JP6439773B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  It relates to pachinko machines.

  As a recent pachinko game machine, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, The mainstream is pachinko gaming machines that transition to the state and can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface to obtain a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this manner, there is a probability-changing gaming state that increases the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and a time-reducing gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery There is also a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player by these game states. Then, by outputting the information on the game progress status to the outside, it is useful for releasing game information to the player, managing profit data on the game hall side, or monitoring fraud.

JP 2000-5399 A JP-A-62-379 JP-A-8-187321 JP 2008-29413 A JP 2013-165859 A JP 2009-279322 A Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-253639 JP-A-4-300573 JP 2012-130658 A JP-A-10-263183 JP 2012-130661 A JP 2008-43605 A JP 2011-50651 A

  However, in recent gaming machines, along with the complexity of gaming, such information to be output externally is diversified, and it is desired to output appropriate information according to the characteristics of gaming machines. There are challenges.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information,
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on the entrance to the starting opening,
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, the random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired random number as a hold until the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied;
When the acceptance determination condition regarding the suspension is satisfied, the acceptance determination means for executing the determination based on the random number related to the suspension;
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the identification information based on a result of the determination of the validity by the validity determination means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section;
When the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, a predetermined number of pieces to the variable winning a prize opening A special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times to make the variable prize opening in an advantageous state for a player until there is a pitch or a predetermined period elapses;
Game state transition that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter a predetermined entrance than the normal game state, and can be controlled to enter the specific game state after the execution of the special game Control means ;
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the specific stop identification information is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the specific stop identification information. A lottery state transition control means having a high probability lottery state having a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and capable of controlling the lottery state to be the high probability lottery state after completion of execution of the special game ,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The execution period of the special game is a start demonstration period that is a waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the unit game, and the last time from the start of execution of the unit game that is the first time. A unit game execution period until the end of execution of the unit game, and an end demonstration period that is a waiting period from the end of execution of the unit game to the end of execution of the special game,
The first information is continuously output over the start demo period, the unit game execution period, and the end demo period.
A period in which the first information is output during the start demonstration period when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information and the special game is executed in the specific game state; A period in which the first information is output during the start demo period when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information and the special game is executed in the normal gaming state; The first information is output during the end demo period when the special game is executed when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information in the specific game state. During the end demo period when the special game is executed while the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information in the normal game state Being configured towards increase of the difference between the period in which the first information is output,
When the special game is executed when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information A of the specific stop identification information and the special game is executed, the high-probability lottery state and It is configured to be in the specific gaming state,
The first information during the end demonstration period when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information and the special game is executed in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state. During the output period, in the low probability lottery state and the normal game state, the termination demonstration when the special game is executed with the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information A It is configured to be shorter than the period during which the first information is output during the period,
The first information during the end demonstration period when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information and the special game is executed in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state. The effect execution time of the effect executed during the output period is the special game in which the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information A in the low probability lottery state and the normal game state. Is configured to be shorter than the production execution time of the effect that is executed during the period in which the first information is output during the end demonstration period.
As the effect, a notification effect for preventing forgetting to take out the privilege recording medium can be executed,
In the low demonstration lottery state and the normal gaming state, the notification effect is displayed during the end demonstration period when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information A and the special game is executed. Configured to run,
There are provided a plurality of winning entrances through which game balls can enter, the plurality of winning entrances include the predetermined entrance and the variable winning entrance,
As external output information for outputting from pachinko gaming machine to the outside, it is configured to be able to output specific information different from the first information,
The specific information satisfies an output condition every time the total number of winning balls awarded based on the winning balls at each of the plurality of winning holes reaches a predetermined number, and the specific information is output. When the new output condition is satisfied when the output period of the certain specific information has expired, the new specific information is output after the output is once terminated. Configured,
The number of prize balls awarded based on one entry to the variable prize opening is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, while the number of prize balls awarded based on one entry to the predetermined entrance is It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being less than the predetermined number.
<Appendix>
In addition, although the different aspect different from this aspect is listed below, it can implement without being limited to these at all.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this different aspect is
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information,
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop display after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section;
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, or after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the variable prize opening can be made advantageous for the player. A special game control means capable of executing a special game,
The rate at which the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is lower than the rate at which the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group.
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is information that is output in response to the execution of a special game, and is configured to be information that is output until the special game ends.
At the time of execution of a special game resulting from the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the first period has passed since the identification information was stopped and displayed. Configured to start the output of a single information,
At the time of execution of a special game due to the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the second period has passed since the identification information was stopped and displayed. Configured to start the output of a single information,
The second period is configured to be longer than the first period,
As external output information for outputting from pachinko gaming machine to the outside, it is configured to be able to output second information different from the first information,
The second information is configured to be output when triggered by a stop display after the identification information is variably displayed.
Either when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group and the special game is executed, or when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group and the special game is executed The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first information is output after the second information is output when the identification information is stopped and displayed.
<Appendix>
In addition, although the different aspect different from this aspect is listed below, it can implement without being limited to these at all.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this different aspect is
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display section (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11 for controlling to stop display after the identification information is variably displayed on the symbol display part A21g and the second main game symbol display part B21g). -C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, or after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10) And a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the second grand prize opening C20) in an advantageous state for the player,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is information that is output in response to the execution of a special game, and is configured to be information that is output until the special game ends.
At the time of execution of a special game resulting from the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the first timing is triggered by the fact that the first timing is reached after the identification information is stopped and displayed. Configured to start the output of a single information,
At the time of execution of a special game resulting from the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the second timing is reached after the identification information is stopped and displayed. Configured to start the output of a single information,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first timing and the second timing are different.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, there is an effect that it is possible to externally output appropriate information according to the characteristics of the gaming machine.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a unit configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an operation diagram relating to the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start-entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game starting entrance entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) big winning opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the general winning opening entering process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of out-entry ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of prize ball payout command transmission control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is an image diagram related to a prize ball payout command and payout related information on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 1 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the payout control board side main process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of detection of a payout motor operation abnormality on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of payout abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of ball path abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of detecting a payout motor abnormality on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of a payout stop abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception processing (vs. main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of prize ball payout control processing (at the start of prize ball payout / motor drive start) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor driving / at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout control process (during motor drive) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the motor error process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of error notification execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 2 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 3 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 72 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 4 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is an error control list 1 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 74 is an error control list 2 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 75 is a signal output pattern correspondence table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 76 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an operation diagram relating to the second grand prize opening according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entrance determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 87 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 5 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 90 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 5-1 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 5-2 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 6 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 103 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 7 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 106 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 7-1 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 109 is an error control list 3 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, for example, numbers, letters, designs. The thing with the shape of etc. can be mentioned. In this specification, “identification information” may be called a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (design), but the “special symbol (special symbol)” is the main control board. The “decorative pattern (design)” is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. “Displaying identification information” is not limited to a display method. For example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only whether light is emitted but also a color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Direction” refers to display content that enhances the fun of the game. For example, identification information fluctuates / stops, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photos, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following condition, the advance state = easy-to-win state and the evacuation state = non-easy-to-win state. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. “Estimated average execution time of easy-to-play games per unit time” is assumed to be a situation in which there is a constant change in the auxiliary game symbol (for example, there is always a hold related to the auxiliary game symbol). In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the start port. In terms of internal processing, in other words, for example, When a variable member is attached to the start port, the length of the variable member opening period (so-called open extension function activated / non-actuated state), the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member is won Probability level (so-called ordinary figure high probability state / low probability state), normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol), which is the trigger for opening the variable member, the length of change time (so-called usual figure fluctuation reduction function) Operating condition-actuated state), is realized by any one or more combinations of the like.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. Furthermore, numerical values (for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each gaming state, etc.) as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications are as follows: This is merely an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, according to the condition of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the condition of the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game, by the time shortening game and non- It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in the conditions for time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the magnitude relationship between the winning probability at the time of the lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is as follows: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be changed as appropriate so that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side, etc. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring based on the intention that the probability variation gaming state will continue until the next jackpot occurs, whether to set “65535” as the number of continuations (configure to continue substantially), Or, even in the options of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next jackpot occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples Should be understood as appropriate.

  Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Pachinko gaming machines are roughly divided into a gaming machine frame D and a gaming board Da, and the gaming machine frame D and the gaming board Da are each formed by assembling a plurality of units. Hereinafter, each unit constituting the gaming machine frame D and the game board Da will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame D of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame unit D12, a front frame unit D14, a transparent plate unit (or glass unit) D16, a door unit (or glass door) D18, and a ball tray unit D17. (Including an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a firing handle D44).

  The outer frame unit D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it is to be installed, and the upper, lower, left, and right frame fences (upper frame collar D12d, lower frame collar D12e, left frame collar D12a, right frame collar D12b). The curtain plate D12c is assembled in a frame shape as a unit. Here, a pair of upper and lower front frame hinges D12a-1 for assembling the front frame unit D14 is fixed to the left frame rod D12a, and an outer frame for locking the front frame unit D14 is fixed to the right frame rod D12b. A frame side locking bracket (not shown) is fixed. In the present embodiment, the speaker D24 capable of outputting sound according to the gaming state is disposed on the curtain plate D12c, and the left and right frame rods (the left frame rod D12a and the right frame rod D12b) are vertically The frame frame (upper frame frame D12d, lower frame frame D12e) is made of wood, and the curtain plate D12c is made of resin.

  The front frame unit D14 is a frame whose outer size matches the opening of the outer frame unit D12, and includes a front frame hinge D12a-1 and a locking bracket (not shown) provided on the outer frame unit D12, A hinge mechanism D14a-1 provided at an appropriate position of the frame unit D14 (corresponding to these) and a locking device (not shown) are attached to the outer frame unit D12 so that it can be opened and closed laterally and locked.

  The front frame unit D14 includes a launching mechanism for launching a game ball, a game board housing mechanism for detachably housing the game board Da, a prize ball payout mechanism for giving a prize ball, A game-completed ball discharge mechanism or the like for collection is provided. In the present embodiment, a base frame body D14a that forms a base and forms a game board accommodation mechanism and has a launch mechanism attached thereto, and is detachably attached to the front frame body D14a. A front frame unit D14 is formed from the back mechanism unit D14b in which the mechanism is formed. Further, a pair of upper and lower glass frame hinges D14a-2 for assembling a door unit D18 described later is provided on the left side of the front frame body D14a, and the door unit D18 is provided on the right side of the front frame body D14a. A glass frame locking device (not shown) for locking is provided. Further, a ball tray unit support mechanism (including a ball tray hinge D14a-3) for assembling a ball tray unit D17, which will be described later, is provided below the front frame body D14a.

  The transparent plate unit D16 is for holding a plurality of (for example, two) transparent plates D16a such as glass and acrylic plates in parallel with a predetermined interval (about 20 mm). After glass is inserted into a glass holding portion (not shown) formed on the one member D16b, a second member D16c that shields the insertion portion is fitted and adhered to be integrated. The transparent plate unit D16 (particularly, the transparent plate D16a) can see through the game area D30 of the game board Da through an opening surface of the door unit D18 described later, and foreign matter does not enter from the opening surface (this It is difficult to access the game board Da and the game area D30 from the opening surface.

  The door unit (glass door) D18 is provided at an appropriate position of the glass frame hinge D14a-2 and the glass frame locking device (not shown) provided in the front frame unit D14 and the door unit D18 (corresponding to these). It is attached to the front frame unit D14 so that it can be opened and closed laterally and locked by a hinge mechanism and a locking metal fitting (not shown). The door unit D18 is configured to have an outer size substantially matching the outer shape of the game board Da, and an opening D18a is provided in the center with an area smaller than that of the transparent plate unit D16. A game board Da and a game area D30, which will be described later, are visible through D16.

  The door unit D18 has a transparent plate unit holding portion D18b for holding the transparent plate unit D16 on the back side thereof, and a decorative portion that is decorated around the opening D18a so as to obtain an electric decoration effect and a visual effect. D18c and the like are also formed. In the present embodiment, a frame decoration lamp D18-L is provided at the upper right portion of the door unit D18 and an upper center portion of the door unit D18 is opened when a predetermined effect (for example, a big hit) is executed (illustrated by a dotted line). ) Lighting effect opening / closing accessory D18-Y (i.e., the initial position is closed and non-lighting, and when a predetermined performance execution start condition is satisfied, Is turned on and is a member that is closed again and is not lit when a predetermined performance execution end condition is satisfied, and a member whose operation is controlled by a sub-control board S described later), Is arranged. Details of the component configuration and the like of the door unit D18 will be described later.

  The ball tray unit D17 includes a ball tray unit support mechanism (including a ball tray hinge D14a-3) provided in the front frame unit D14, and an engagement member (for example, an engagement member) provided at an appropriate position of the ball tray unit D17. It is detachably attached to the front frame unit D14 by the joint member D17a-1). The ball tray unit D17 can be detached from the front frame unit D14 only when the door unit D18 is opened and closed, so that the ball tray unit D17 can be removed in a state where it is used for gaming without providing a dedicated key for the gaming machine. A difficult structure (for example, a structure in which a part of the door unit D18 and a part of the ball tray unit D17 wrap) is employed.

  The ball tray unit D17 has an outer size formed in a square shape, an upper ball tray D20 for supplying game balls to the launching device at the upper portion, and a large number of prize balls at the lower portion. When an excessive amount of game balls is supplied to D20, a lower ball tray D22 capable of storing the excess game balls is formed. On the right side of the lower ball plate D22, the launch intensity (game) A firing handle D44 for adjusting the ball hitting position) is provided. Further, on a part of the surface of the ball tray unit D17 (in this example, the upper surface of the upper ball tray D20), a sub input button SB operated by the player at the time of production, a lending operation unit for making a lending request for the game ball ( (Not shown) is provided. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22. Details of the component configuration of the ball tray unit D17 will be described later.

  Although the schematic configuration of the gaming machine frame D in the present embodiment is as described above, as described above, the gaming machine frame D is composed of a plurality of units, and more specifically, the front of the outer frame unit D12. The front frame unit D14 (including the game board Da), and the transparent plate unit D16, the door unit D18, and the ball tray unit D17 are configured to be detachable (or openable / closable) in front of the front frame unit D14. For this reason, the alignment part of each unit has a minute gap for facilitating the opening / closing operation and the attaching / detaching operation. Therefore, in this embodiment, although not shown in the drawings, the alignment portion of each unit has a labyrinth structure (uneven shape in a cross-sectional view) so that the gap does not become linear in order to prevent foreign matter from entering. It is desirable to employ a structure such that (but not limited to).

  In the present embodiment, the door unit D18 and the ball tray unit D17 adopt a separate structure, but both may adopt an integral structure. Further, in the present embodiment, a structure in which a physical game medium is paid out according to the game result is adopted. However, electronic medium management may be performed. In that case, the lower ball tray D22, the prize ball payout mechanism, etc. are not required, and a game machine form (so-called enclosed circulation form) in which a game-completed ball is returned to the upper ball dish D20 to perform electronic management is adopted. It will be supplemented that an operation unit for settlement / rental using an electronic medium is arranged in the dish unit D17 or the door unit D18.

  Next, a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34 is formed in the game board Da. In addition, the game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning ports, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20 (or may be called distribution prize opening C20), 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, production display device SG, The auxiliary game symbol display device H20, the center decoration D38, and the out port C80 are installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided apart from each other, and flow down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured to be easily guided to the first main game start opening A10, but difficult to be guided to the second main game start opening B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is not easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is easily guided to the second main game start port B10. . It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are spaced apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 The two main game start ports B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other. In that case, the upper portion of the second main game start port B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game start port A10. May be.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (reference to the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the right side of the game area D30 (reference to the center of the game area). ) Is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10 (but not limited to this, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) May be configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10}.

  Next, a first big prize opening C10 and a second big prize opening C20 are provided above the out mouth C80 (in particular, the right side of the game area D30), and the right side of the game area D30 (in the middle of the game area). The game balls flowing down the standard) are configured to easily pass through the area where the first grand prize winning opening C10 and the second big winning prize opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening C80.

  Next, the first grand prize winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped by the big hit symbol, and is an out port. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above C80 (in particular, the right side of the game area D30). Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1) The first prize winning solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state in which a bar-like member provided in the big prize opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side) The slide-type attacker has a box-shaped member that can receive a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down the game area D30. The prize-winning mouth is closed due to obstruction of the acceptance of the game ball into the box, and when it is in the retracted state, the prize-winning mouth is open by allowing the reception of the game ball into the box-shaped member This is suitable for the case where it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. The winning opening corresponding to the main game is located above the opening C80 (in particular, the right side of the game area D30). Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening C20 are configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Variable (exciting and changing the second big prize opening solenoid C23). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state in which a bar-like member provided in the big prize opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side) The slide-type attacker has a box-shaped member that can receive a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down the game area D30. The prize-winning mouth is closed due to obstruction of the acceptance of the game ball into the box, and when it is in the retracted state, the prize-winning mouth is open by allowing the reception of the game ball into the box-shaped member This is suitable for the case where it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of losing {but not limited to this, a 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique that does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) by giving the first main gaming symbol (second main gaming symbol) itself an effect role, an effect described later You may comprise so that a 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display like display apparatus SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in a game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, an error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs and notifies the occurrence of the error, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a prize to each prize opening In accordance with the prize ball tank KT, a prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a prize ball payout unit KE10 for paying out the game balls to the upper ball tray D20 and the payout operation by the prize ball payout unit KE10 are controlled. A prize ball payout control board KH, an error indicator KH3 for displaying an error occurrence state (for example, 7-segment display), an error release switch KH3a for releasing a predetermined error, and an upper ball tray D20 Launching device D42 that launches each game ball (reserved ball) into the game area D30, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and a power supply unit that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine E and a power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine, are provided on the back of the front frame unit D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and the operating principle for paying out the game balls will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 4, the winning ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (stepping motor) KE10m that is driven at the time of payout. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 4, the winning ball payout unit KE10 includes a sprocket KE10p connected to a stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters the winning opening in the game area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and sends a signal of the winning ball to the winning ball payout control board KH To do. Alternatively, a ball lending request is made from the game ball lending device such as the card unit R to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes the payout of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 5, when the stepping motor KE10m rotates, the sprocket KE10p (the member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2 and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) rotates, and the game ball is rotated. One ball is paid out. Also, the paid-out game balls are detected by a payout count sensor KE10s provided continuously downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. In addition, about the cross-section CC, it supplements that the cross section along the flow path of a game ball (the flow path is easy to see) is shown in figure.

  The lower part of FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a rotor position confirmation sensor (dispensing motor position sensor) KE10 ms and a rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (an example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photosensor that has a pair of measurement units and detects an object between the measurement units by projecting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measuring units are a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and is arranged with the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 interposed therebetween. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 has six concave portions formed along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit. When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light projecting part and the light receiving part, it is turned on (the lower state in FIG. 4).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during games and computer programs read from ROM, etc.) handled by, and a backup area (and power supply for backup) for holding information when power is interrupted ing.

  Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined. First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st grand prize opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize opening prize detection device C21s, general prize detection apparatus (not shown, but the general prize opening is always open regardless of whether or not a special game is executed) In addition, there is a winning hole that has a winning ball but does not perform symbol lottery, etc.)}, a driving solenoid (not shown) (first large winning hole solenoid C13, second large winning hole solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED A game peripheral device (input / output device indispensable for the progress of the game, such as (not shown)) (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared in the figure) Peripheral equipment C, auxiliary gaming peripheral equipment H) and electricity It is connected to, and controls the progress of the game based on the input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 6, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. The main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information via the external relay terminal board G (output to the hall computer HC side). One-way communication) is possible (details will be described later).

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. The game ball lending device R (card unit R) for transmission is connected. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit (launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launching apparatus D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, as described above, the sub-control board S is an effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols and the like, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown, but a so-called effect). For example, a motor / solenoid of a movable body accessory. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) Control of lighting of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured to be In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, the flow path of the game sphere used for the game will be described with reference to the flow path image diagram of the game sphere in the lower part of FIG. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the game balls launched into the game area D30 are the entrance holes {first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10, first major winning port C10, first The ball enters one of the two major winning openings C20, the general winning opening (not shown), or the out opening C80}, and passes through a ball entry sensor corresponding to each of the winning openings into the gaming machine (in the gaming machine frame D). Be guided. Here, the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 passes through the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2 provided for fraud detection. Thereafter, all the game balls guided into the gaming machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s and are discharged out of the gaming machine. Although not specifically shown in this example, a switch for confirming the entrance {each entrance (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, the first major winning port C10, the first A game ball that has entered the two major winning openings C20, the general winning opening), and has one or a plurality of switches that are different from the switches for detecting the entering into each of the winning openings} It shall be.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. The sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) includes a sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), frame decoration lamps D18-L, The speaker D24 and the like are also electrically connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub-main control part SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. are data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each means included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  First, the main control board M has a game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of games such as special games and specific games. A game progress means MP for managing the game, a game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing information relating to the game state, and the fraud detection information management means ME (and The fraud related information temporary storage means MEb) for temporarily storing information related to error detection and fraud detection, and various game information {eg, stop symbol information, stop, on the game peripheral device side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) Symbol attribute information {for example, 16R big hit, 8R big hit, 4R big hit, losing}, information on variation mode (for example, variation time), special game start signal / state information / end signal, hold Information transmission control means MT (and command transmission buffer MT10 for accumulating unsent commands) and external information for outputting information related to the game to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G Signal output control means MG, and prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out predetermined prize balls based on winning of game balls to various winning holes. .

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the entrance determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls to each entrance (starting opening, etc.), and the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each starting port during the variable display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the entrance determination means MJ10 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start port A10 (and the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2). Determining means MJ11-A, second main game start opening entrance determining means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the second main game start opening B10, and a game ball in the auxiliary game start opening H10 Auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11-H for determining whether or not a game has flown, and a first grand entrance entrance determination for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first major entrance port C10. Means MJ11-C10 and second big prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C20 for judging whether or not a game ball has entered the second big prize opening C20 and a game ball in the general prize opening (not shown). General winning entrance entrance judging means (not shown) for judging whether or not the player has entered, and out Determining whether or not a game ball has entered C80, determining whether or not a game ball has entered (detected discharge) the out-entry ball determination means MJ11-C80 and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s; Total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 (and a total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 that counts the number of entered balls) and a temporary entry related information for temporarily storing information related to entering the entrance Storage means MJ10b and a number-of-entrance counter MJ10c for counting the total number of entrances to each entrance (in this example, the counter value is configured to be cleared only by RAM clear based on power interruption) However, the value may be automatically cleared upon elapse of a predetermined time (e.g., 8 hours corresponding to a game hall business stoppage time)}, and the first main game start opening A10 Game entered A first main game start port entrance number counter MJ10c-A for counting the number, a first main game start port check counter MJ10c2-A for counting the number of game balls detected by the first main game start port check sensor A11s2, ,have.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the game ball entering the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result, To first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, first winning random number, first variation mode determining random number, first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and second main game starting port B10 And determining whether or not to acquire the second main game random number based on the incoming game ball, and depending on the determination result, the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main random number, A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring a game symbol determination random number and the like, and an auxiliary game random number for determining whether or not the auxiliary game side random number can be acquired and acquiring the random number based on the determination result Acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H That.

  Here, the “random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “random number” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 and the hold digest control means MJ31 for controlling the processing related to the hold digest and the fluctuation start, and the first main game random number obtained in a situation where the change permission of the first main game symbol is not given. Is temporarily stored, and based on the determination result, the first random number is stored in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until permission to change the first main game symbol is granted. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number acquired in a situation where the main game symbol holding means MJ32-A and the second main game symbol change permission are not granted, and based on the determination result The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding random numbers in the second main game symbol hold information means MJ32b-B until the second main game symbol change permission is lowered, and the auxiliary game symbol change permission is granted. Going down It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the auxiliary game side random number acquired in a situation where there is not, and based on the determination result, the random number is held in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the change permission of the auxiliary game symbol is granted And auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for carrying out.

  Here, the pending digest control means MJ31 has a change start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not a condition for starting change is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store a maximum of four, and combine the random numbers with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporary storage in the form of Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN draws a stop symbol for each symbol based on each random number and a random determination means MN10 for lottery whether or not to shift to a special game and whether or not the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is open. Symbol content determining means MN40 for determining, and variation mode determining means MN50 for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on each random number. Here, the success / failure lottery means MN10 is a first main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-A that performs a success / failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbol, and a second main game winner / rejection lottery unit that performs a success / failure lottery with respect to the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for making a winning / notifying lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the lottery regarding the first main game symbol. The first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing the success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol on / off lottery Each of them has an auxiliary gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the symbol content determination unit MN40 acquires the first main game symbol determination unit MN41-A that determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), and the acquisition Based on the determined game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result. The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol, The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the variation mode determination unit MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first primary game random number). MN 51-A and second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), And auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state. The second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (for example, normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time shortening game → auxiliary game time shortening lottery table. ).

  Next, the display control means MP10 performs a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C that controls to stop display after changing the first main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, assist for a predetermined time. Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling to stop and display after changing the game symbol is provided.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a zero / clearable first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (for example, a decrement counter which is subtracted at predetermined intervals). Hereinafter, those similar to timers can be mounted with the same counter). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening and closing the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is satisfied. The second main game start port electric player opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B and the second main game start port electric player opening timer MP22t for measuring the driving (opening) time of the second main game start port electric player B11d -B and the game ball remaining in the second main game start port electric combination B11d after the second main game start port electric combination B11d is closed are detected by the second main game start port entrance detecting device B11s. And a second main game start opening entrance waiting timer MP22t2, which measures the time to wait until

  Next, when the special game control means MP30 satisfies the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the special game transfer condition, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) are determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the mouth C10 or the second grand prize port C20 in a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first grand prize port) Special game time management means MP34 for performing the opening / closing time of C10 and the second big prize opening C20), and distribution game execution control means MP36 for executing the distribution game. Here, the special game execution means MP33 includes first and second prize winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first prize winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second prize winning opening electric accessory C21d. , A winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 is provided. The special game time management means MP34 includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time, an opening timer MP34t2 for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening, and the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20). The game balls remaining in the first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) after the closing are detected by the first big prize opening prize detection device C11s (or the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s). It further has a special winning opening entrance waiting timer MP34t3 that measures the time to wait until the game is completed. The special game content determination means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table) The details of are not shown, but are a table in which the open prize opening, the maximum number of rounds, the execution contents of one round, etc. are determined, and the first round is executed after the special game is started The start demo time, which is the waiting time until the game is played, the end demo time, which is the wait time from the end of the final round to the end of the special game, and the like are also predetermined in this table).

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the probability variation end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition for the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition for the time-reduced game state is satisfied. It has a short game end condition determination means MP52 for determination. Each has a short time counter MP52c capable of counting the short time. Here, the probability variation gaming state means a gaming state in which the winning probability at the time of winning or failing the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol is higher than the non-stochastic variation gaming state, and the time shortening gaming state Means that the average value of the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is shorter than the non-time-reduced game state, and / or the second main game start opening electric accessory per unit time It means a gaming state in which the ease of opening B11d is improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the auxiliary game symbol becomes a winning symbol with a high probability, and the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively prolonged ( Opening time extension function). Also, the time-reduced game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes of the first main game symbol and the number of times of change of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability variation game with no time limit restriction). except for). That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol fluctuate (stop). Note that the probability variation end condition determination means MP51 and the short time game end condition determination means MP52 perform, for example, a lottery to shift from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time the symbol changes. It may have a function to perform (in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a so-called falling lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). First and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, on / off of various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB20b and the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C are stopped according to the first or second main game symbol that is currently changing (the first or second main game symbol that satisfies the change start condition). There are first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

  Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game symbol information for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (auxiliary game symbol satisfying the change start condition). Means MB11b-H are provided.

  Next, the prize ball payout determining means MH sends and receives payout information transmission / reception means MHsj (and transmission / reception) for sending and receiving information relating to the prize ball payout (and error detection and fraud detection) with the prize ball payout control board KH side. A payout command temporary storage means MHsjb) for temporarily storing the received information, a prize ball number counter MHc for counting the total number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls, and the prize ball payout has not been completed (prize ball payout) Unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb for temporarily storing information relating to unpaid prize balls (which has not received information relating to the completion of withdrawal from the control board KH side).

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the result of the game. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have. As for the first main game start opening A10, the first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s for detecting the entrance to the first main game start opening A10, and the entry is a normal entry. And a first main game start opening confirmation sensor A11s2 for confirming whether or not there is an entry at any of the entrances (especially only at the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s). Is detected, a process related to an illegal act or an error occurrence is executed (details will be described later). When two balls are used to double check the entrance, use sensors with different detection mechanisms (for example, non-contact photo sensor and contact physical switch). However, it is suitable for detecting fraud.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And the second major winning opening C20, the out opening C80 for taking in the gaming balls that have not entered the starting opening or winning opening of the gaming balls launched into the gaming area D30, and the starting opening or entering A total discharge confirmation sensor C90s provided on a path for discharging game balls taken into the game machine from the mouth and out port C80 to the outside of the game machine, and for detecting the game balls discharged from the game machine; Yes.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes the auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, effect content determination processing and display control processing for effect display. Effect display control means SM20 for controlling the error, error notification control means SM30 for controlling error notification when an error occurs, and information transmission / reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereafter, each said means is explained in full detail.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information regarding the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the decorative pattern variation mode and stop symbol determination processing and display control processing, and the decorative symbol display control processing that holds the decorative symbol hold count management and hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, background effect display control means SM23 for determining background image determination processing and display control processing, notice effect display control means SM24 for controlling determination effect display processing and display control processing, and reach effect content And reach effect display control means SM25 for managing the determination process and the display control process.

  Next, the error notification control means SM30 has an error occurrence determination means SM31 for determining whether or not an error has occurred.

  Here, the decorative design display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the display design content determination means SM21n for determining the stop design and the variation mode of the decorative design, and the decorative design display variation SM21n. The drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and the drawing variation time management timer SM21t for timing the variation time of the decorative symbols; ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n further includes a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). (Not shown).

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 includes a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to the hold related to the decorative design, and a hold prefetch effect execution control means for executing the hold prefetch effect. SM26. Here, the hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 further includes a hold pre-reading effect execution enable / disable determining means SM26k that determines whether or not the hold pre-reading effect can be executed (for example, whether or not there is a hold that will be a big hit in the hold). Have.

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23 is displayed based on the information from the main control board M side, and the background effect (in this example, it is displayed on the back of the decorative symbol, and the possibility of executing the special game based on the information regarding the hold) Background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of the effect), and background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for temporarily storing information related to the background effect display.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 is displayed based on the information from the main control board M side, and is displayed during the notice effect (in this example, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the expected degree of transition to the special game in the change) In order to temporarily store the information related to the notice effect display and the notice effect display content determining means SM24n for determining the display content, display timing, etc. of the effect that suggests / informs the feasibility of the special game based on the information related to the hold. The notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25, based on the information from the main control board M side, reaches the reach state (mainly during the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the reach state by the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed. This is an effect that is executed after the fact that it has been notified, but it also includes an effect that is executed in conjunction with the change display of the decorative symbol even if it does not reach the reach state) Reach effect display content determining means SM25n to be determined, and reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing information related to reach effect display.

  Next, the effect display means (sub-sub control part) SS displays an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG and the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control part SM side. Display control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information relating to various image displays.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decoration symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decoration symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the initial setting is performed (not shown, but the register initialization, the input / output port setting, etc. are performed), and then in step 1002, the main control board M displays the RAM clear button Whether the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by a game hall manager or the like. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up to the RAM in Step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up to the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored in the RAM of the main control board M in Step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (the command may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and described later. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the regular interrupt period T (for example, hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 2000, the main control board M executes a ball entry detection process described later. In step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, at step 1500, the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1900, the main control board M executes fraud detection information management processing. Next, in step 1950, the main control board M executes an error management process described later. Next, in step 3000, the main control board M executes a prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to the external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.) described later. Next, in step 1990, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side) and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being performed.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the incoming ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, at step 2100, the entry determination means executes an auxiliary game start entrance entry detection process to be described later. Next, at step 2200, the incoming ball judging means executes a main game start opening incoming ball detection process which will be described later. Next, in step 2300, the entry determination means executes a first (second) big prize opening entrance detection process described later. Next, in step 2400, the entry determination means executes a general winning opening entry detection process described later. Next, in step 2500, the ball entry determination means executes a discharge ball detection process to be described later. Next, at step 2600, the incoming ball judging means executes an out mouth incoming ball detecting process to be described later. Next, in step 2700, the pitch determination means executes a prize ball determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1100).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start-entry ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the auxiliary game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-H refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game start entrance detection continuation flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in Step 2102, in Step 2104, the auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11 -H determines that the input from the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s is the entrance detection time (the relevant game start port over the time). When the entrance detection device H11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (the time it is considered that there is an entrance to the auxiliary game start port H10). In the case of Yes in step 2104, in step 2106, the auxiliary game start port entrance determination means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2108, the auxiliary game start port entry determining means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and performs the next processing ( The process proceeds to step 2200).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2110, the auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11-H determines that the input from the auxiliary game start port entrance detecting device H11s is the detection end time (the auxiliary game start is more than the time). If the entrance ball detection device H11s has not detected an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for a time period that is considered to have been passed through the auxiliary game start entrance ball entrance detection device H11s. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the auxiliary game start port entry determining means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). Note that if the answer is No in Step 2104 or Step 2110, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game start entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in Step 2202, the first main game start port entry determining means MJ11-A refers to the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the first main game start port detection continuation flag is off. judge. In the case of Yes in Step 2202, in Step 2204, the first main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-A receives the input from the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s as the entrance detection time (above that time, When the first main game start port entrance detection device A11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the first main game start port A10s is ON for a time period when it is considered that a first main game start port A10 has entered a ball. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the first main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-A turns on the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in Step 2208, the first main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-A adds 1 to the counter value of the entrance number counter MJ10c (increment). Next, in Step 2210, the first main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game start entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, in Step 2211, the first main game start opening entrance determination means MJ11-A adds 1 to the value of the first main game start entrance entrance number counter MJ10c-A, and proceeds to Step 2216. To do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2212, the input from the number-of-entries counter MJ10c is detected time (when the first main game starting entrance detection device A11s has not detected the input for the time or longer, the game It is determined whether or not the ball is OFF for more than the time that the ball has passed through the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s. Next, in Step 2214, the first main game start opening entrance judging means MJ11-A is in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first main game start port detection continuation flag is turned off. Next, in step 2215, the first main game start port entry determining means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start port long time detection flag in the flag area of the entry related temporary information storage means MJ10b. The process proceeds to step 2216. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2204 or Step 2212, the process proceeds to Step 2216.

  Next, in Step 2216, the first main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-A determines whether or not the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2 has detected a game ball. In the case of Yes in step 2216, in step 2218, the first main game start port entrance judging means MJ11-A adds 1 to the counter value of the first main game start port confirmation counter MJ10c2-A (increment), and step 2222. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2216, the process proceeds to step 2222.

  Next, in Step 2222, the second main game start port entry determining means MJ11-B refers to the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and whether or not the second main game start port detection continuation flag is on. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11 -B receives the input from the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B 11 s as the entrance detection time (above that time, When the second main game start port entrance detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the second main game start port B10s is ON for a time period when it is considered that the second main game start port B10 has entered the ball. In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the second main game start port entry determining means MJ11-B refers to the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the second main game start port effective period flag is on. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the second main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, in Step 2228, the second main game start opening entrance determining means MJ11-B adds 1 to the counter value of the entrance number counter MJ10c (increment). Next, in Step 2230, the second main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, Control goes to step 2240.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry to the second main game start opening B10 is not effective), in step 2231, the second main game start entrance determination The means MJ11-B determines that there is an illegal entry at the second main game start opening B10, sets the second main game start opening illegal entry command (command to the sub-side), and proceeds to step 2240. . Note that if the result is No in Step 2224, the process proceeds to Step 2240.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2222, in step 2232, the second main game start entrance entrance determining means MJ <b> 11 -B determines that the input from the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B <b> 11 s is detected time (above that time, If the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s has not detected an input, whether or not the game ball has passed through the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s is OFF for more than judge. In the case of Yes in step 2232, in step 2234, the second main game start port entry determining means MJ11-B is the second main game start port detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn off. Next, in Step 2238, the second main game start port entry determining means MJ11-B turns off the second main game start port long time detection flag in the flag area of the entry related temporary information storage means MJ10b. The process proceeds to step 2240.

  Next, in Step 2240, the first main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-A (second main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-B) is the first main game start entrance entrance detecting device A11s (first). (2) The main game start entrance ball entry detection device B11s) is ON for more than the fraud detection time (the time that exceeds the time detected as a normal entry and is determined to be fraud). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the first main game start entrance entrance determination means MJ11-A (second main game start entrance entrance determination means MJ11-B) is stored in the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) main game start port long-time detection flag in the flag area is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2240, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) big winning opening entrance detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in Step 2302, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (second big prize entrance entrance judging means MJ11-C20) refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and It is determined whether or not the 1 (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag is OFF. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (second big prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C20) is the first grand prize opening prize detecting device C11s (first Whether the input from the two major winning opening detection devices (C21s) is ON for at least the ball detection time (the time when the ball detection device detects an input when the ball detection device detects an input) or longer. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in step 2305, the first big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C20) refers to the incoming related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Then, it is determined whether or not the flag during the first (second) big winning opening is valid. In the case of Yes in step 2305, in step 2306, the first big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the incoming related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn on the first (second) big prize winning ball entrance flag. Next, in step 2308, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (second big prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C20) adds 1 to the counter value of the entrance number counter MJ10c (increment). To do. Next, in step 2310, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (second big prize opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20) is in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) big prize opening detection continuation flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2320.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2305 (when a game ball is detected during a period in which entry into the big winning opening is not valid), in step 2311 the first big winning opening entering determination means MJ11-C10 ( The second grand prize opening entry determining means MJ11-C20) determines that there is an illegal entry in the big prize opening, and issues the first (second) big prize opening illegal entry command (command to the sub side). Set and go to step 2320. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2304, the process proceeds to Step 2320.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2302, in Step 2312, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (the second big prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C20) is the first grand prize opening prize detecting device C11s. When the input from the (second grand prize winning prize detection device C21s) is detected time {when the time is equal to or longer than the first big prize winning prize winning detection device C11s (second big prize winning prize winning detection device C21s) Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time when it is considered that the game ball has passed through the first grand prize winning prize detection device C11s (second big prize winning prize winning detection device C21s). In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the first big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the incoming related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) big prize opening detection continuation flag inside is turned off. Next, in step 2318, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (second big prize entrance entrance judging means MJ11-C20) is in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The 1 (second) special winning opening long time detection flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2320.

  Next, in step 2320, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (second big prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C20) is the first grand prize opening prize detecting device C11s (second grand prize opening). When the input from the winning detection device C21s) is fraud detection time {over the time, the first grand prize winning prize detection device C11s (second big winning prize winning detection device C21s) detects the input, the first big winning mouth C10 It is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that an illegal entry to (second big prize opening C20) is detected}. In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the first big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the related entry temporary information storage means MJ10b. The first (second) big prize opening long-time detection flag inside is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2320, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the general winning opening entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. The general winning opening is not particularly shown, but when a game ball enters, the winning ball is paid out but does not affect the progress of the game. A general winning opening entrance detecting device (not shown), which is a sensor to detect, is provided. Further, the winning entry determining means MJ10 has general winning entry entrance determining means (not shown) for determining the presence / absence of entering a general winning opening.

  First, in step 2402, the general winning opening entry determining means refers to the incoming related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is OFF. In the case of Yes in step 2402, the general winning entrance entrance determining means determines that the input from the general winning entrance entrance detecting device is the entrance detection time (when the general winning entrance entrance detecting device detects the input for the time or longer, the general winning entrance It is determined whether or not it is ON for a time when it is considered that there is a ball in the mouth. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the general winning opening entry determining means turns on the general winning opening entering flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in Step 2408, the general winning entrance entrance determination means adds 1 to the counter value of the entrance number counter MJ10c (increment). Next, in step 2410, the general winning opening entry determining means turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, the general winning entrance entrance determining means determines that the input from the general winning entrance entrance detecting device is the entrance detection time (the general winning entrance entrance detecting device is not less than the time). If no input is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time that it is considered that the game ball has passed through the general winning entrance entrance ball detection device. In the case of Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the general winning opening entry determining means turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2418, the general winning opening entry determining means turns off the general winning opening long time detection flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2420. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2404 or Step 2412, the process proceeds to Step 2420.

  Next, in step 2420, the general winning entrance entrance determining means determines that the input from the general winning entrance entrance detecting device is an illegal detection time {if the input is detected by the general winning entrance entrance detecting device over the time, It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry to the winning opening is detected}. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the general winning opening entry determining means turns on the general winning opening long time detection flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and performs the next processing ( The process proceeds to step 2500. Even in the case of No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the total discharged ball confirmation means refers to the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the total discharged ball confirmation means determines that the input from the total discharge check sensor C90s is the ball detection time (when the total discharge check sensor C90s detects the input for the time or longer, the total discharge check sensor It is determined whether or not it is ON for a time period when it is considered that there is a ball in C90s. In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506, the total discharged ball confirmation unit turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. Next, in step 2508, the total discharge ball confirmation means adds 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 (increment), and proceeds to step 2520.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the total discharge ball confirmation means determines that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is the detection end time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s has not detected the input for the time or longer). It is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time for which it is considered that the game ball has passed through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s. In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the total discharged ball confirmation means turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2514, the total discharged ball confirmation unit turns off the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag in the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage unit MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2520. Note that if the answer is No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to step 2520.

  Next, in step 2520, the total discharge confirmation unit determines whether the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is an unauthorized detection time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for the time or longer, the total discharge confirmation sensor It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into C90s is being performed. In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the total discharged ball confirmation unit turns on the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag in the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage unit MJ10b, and performs the next process (in step 2600). Process). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2520, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of out-entry ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the out-entry entrance determining unit MJ11-C80 refers to the in-entrance related information temporary storage unit MJ10b and determines whether or not the out-entry detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the out-entry entrance determination unit MJ11 -C80 determines that the input from the out-entry entrance detection device C80s is an ingress detection time (the out-entry entrance detection device C80s When an input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for a time period when it is considered that a ball has entered the outlet C80. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the out-entry entrance determination unit MJ11-C80 turns on the out-entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the ingress-related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. Next, in step 2608, the out-entry entrance determination means MJ11-C80 adds 1 to the entrance number counter MJ10c, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2700).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2602, in step 2610, the out-entry entrance determining unit MJ11 -C80 determines that the input from the out-entry entrance detection device C80s is the detection end time (the out-entry entrance detection device C80s for the time or longer). If no input is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (which is regarded as the completion of passing through the out-entry ball detection device C80s). In the case of Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the out-entry ball entering determination unit MJ11-C80 turns off the out-port detection continuation flag in the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. Next, in step 2615, the out-entry ball entering determination means MJ11-C80 turns off the out-out port long time detection flag in the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process proceeds to step 2620.

  Next, in step 2620, the out-entry ball entering determination means MJ11-C80 determines that the input from the out-entry ball detecting device C80s is the fraud detection time (the out-entry ball detecting device C80s detects the input for the time or longer. If it is determined that it is ON for more than the time during which it is considered that an illegal entry to the outlet C80 is performed. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the out-entry ball entering determination unit MJ11-C80 turns on the out-entry long time detection flag in the flag area of the in-ball related information temporary storage unit MJ10b and performs the next processing. The process proceeds to (Step 2700). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, at step 2702, the winning ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the winning ball payout determination means MH adds the number of winning balls (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting port A10 to the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc. To do. Next, in Step 2708, the prize ball payout determining means MH pays out the prize ball related to the first main game start opening A10 to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb (for example, in the number of prize balls). Information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2712. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2702, the process proceeds to step 2712.

  Next, at step 2712, the winning ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the winning ball payout determining means MH adds the number of winning balls (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting port B10 to the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc. To do. Next, in step 2718, the prize ball payout determining means MH sends information indicating that the prize ball related to the second main game start opening B10 is paid out to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb (for example, the number of prize balls) Information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2722. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2722.

  Next, at step 2722, the winning ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the entering related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first (second) big winning opening entrance ball flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the winning ball payout determining means MH turns off the first (second) big winning opening entrance flag in the flag area of the entering related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, at step 2724, the winning ball payout determining means MH determines the number of winning balls (13 in this example) related to the first big winning port C10 (second winning port C20) as the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc. Is added. Next, at step 2728, the prize ball payout determining means MH pays out the prize balls related to the first big prize opening C10 (second big prize opening C20) to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. (For example, information relating to the number of prize balls) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2722, the process proceeds to step 2732.

  Next, at step 2732, the winning ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the general winning opening entrance flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the winning ball payout determination means MH turns off the general winning opening entrance flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, at step 2734, the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize balls (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the prize ball payout determining means MH gives information (for example, information relating to the number of prize balls) to pay out the prize balls related to the general winning opening to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. Temporarily store and move to the next process (the process of step 1100). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2732, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1100).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start entrance ball determining unit MJ11-H refers to the flag area of the ball related information temporary storage unit MJ10b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the auxiliary game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether or not the number of hold balls is not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). . In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number together with information on what number of the hold is in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when it is No in step 1102 and step 1104, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessory releasing flag is off. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and holds the ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). In addition to the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side gaming state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game short time flag) Is selected, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than in the case of being off) and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, there are “D0, D1, D2” as the stop symbols, and “D1, D2” as the stop symbols as the winning symbols. In the non-time-reduced game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the open mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed), and the open mode of the electric combination that will be opened is stopped. When the symbol is “D1, D2,” the release mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed). In the time-saving game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the release mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed). When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → close). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol “D0” during non-time-reduced games, and the stop symbol is likely to be a winning symbol “D1” during time-reduced games.

  Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H determines the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game short flag is on and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game short flag is off) is set. In step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the hold information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the hold ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, after the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol change display on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H to determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, at step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H.

  Next, in step 1230, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “hit” (D1 · D2 in this example). Determine. In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B is based on the winning design and game state on the auxiliary game side, and the release mode (for example, in the time shortening game) In the case of the winning symbol “D1”, it is opened for 1 second → closed for 1 second → opened for 1 second → closed for 1 second → opened for 1 second → opened in the case of hitting symbol “D2”. Second opening, 0.8 second closing, and 5 second opening mode), and a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric game object in the second main game starting port electric game object release timer MP22t-B. Set. Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory releasing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B starts the second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B, and then the second main game start port electric accessory opening combination. Open the object B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B is a flag indicating that the second main game start port is valid in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1242.

  Next, in step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B, and determines the time for opening the electric accessory. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric combination B11d and temporarily stops the auxiliary game state. The open flag of the electric accessory in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off. Next, in step 1248, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B sets the electric main component start waiting time (in this example, 3) in the second main game start port entrance standby timer MP22t2. Set seconds) and start. Next, in Step 1250, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the second main game start port entrance waiting timer MP22t2, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1250, in step 1252, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B is in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, the second main game start port The validity period flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300). Thus, in this example, the effective period of the second main game start opening (the period during which the second main game start opening effective period flag is on) is the opening timing of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d. From the time until the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is closed, the electric component entry waiting time (in this example, 3 seconds) elapses, and the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is closed. However, it is configured to be able to wait for a game ball to enter for an amount equivalent to the waiting time for entering the electric accessory.

  In the case of No in Step 1202, the process proceeds to Step 1242, in the case of No in Step 1204, the process proceeds to Step 1224, and in the case of No in Step 1206, Step 1224, Step 1230, Step 1240, or Step 1250. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance entry determining means MJ11-A refers to the flag area of the entry related temporary information storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the first main game start flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and holds on the main game (especially the first main game side). It is determined whether or not the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1306, in step 1308, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning lottery random number for determining the success / failure, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1310, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1312, the hold control means MJ30 sets the information (holding occurrence command) related to the acquired first main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM (step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process), and the process proceeds to Step 1322. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1302 or step 1306, the process proceeds to step 1322.

  Next, at step 1322, the second main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-B refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the second main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-B turns off the second main game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 1326, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and holds for the main game (especially the second main game side). It is determined whether or not the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1326, in step 1328, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired in the same manner as the first main game content determination random number. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the first lottery random number for the first main game and the right lottery random number for the second main game) Are set to the same range. Next, in Step 1330, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1332, the hold control means MJ30 sets the information (holding occurrence command) related to the acquired second main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM (step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1400) also in the case of No in Step 1322 or Step 1326.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digest control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and confirms whether there is no hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the pending digest control means MJ31 determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being played (or the condition device is being operated), the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is displayed), during the variable fixed time, You may comprise so that it may not satisfy | fill.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digest control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation that is temporarily stored is read and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding digestion processing). Next, at step 1410-1, the success / failure lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state. Based on 1 main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, a winning lottery random number), a main game symbol winning lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-stochastic varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, the hit (so-called small hit) where the gaming state cannot be changed is not illustrated, but a small hit may be generated (winning for the small hit).

  Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) selects the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game). With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbol is determined based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “4A, 5A, 7A” and “4B, 5B, 7B”) are selected. One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lose symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. When the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the state and the selection rate of the variation mode and / or the selection rate of the main game symbol are different from those before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

  Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) draws the first main game variation mode determination lottery corresponding to each game state. Refer to the table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly the variation The main game symbol variation mode is determined based on the mode lottery random number), temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1415.

  Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, the present embodiment is configured such that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result and the main game short time flag state. That is, when the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result is a win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game short flag is on (relative to the short game state) The variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, it is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but needless to say, it may be configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. Absent. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol on the second main game side When the change is configured to be advantageous for the player, the second main game side is likely to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished}.

  Next, in step 1415, the game content determination means MN determines the commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) related to the main game symbols temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Change mode information, etc.) and a command (symbol change display start instruction command) related to the current gaming state are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission processing in step 1990) Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the main game symbol variation display is started in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control goes to step 1420.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and changes. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in Step 1420, in Step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends the information indicating that the symbol variation is ended (the symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( The change display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display part B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as the fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, in step 1424, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns off the changing flag in the flag area of the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No at step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

  Next, at step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500). Even in the case of No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, at step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1458, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction count) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1458, in step 1460 and step 1462, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. (Step 1500). In addition, also when No is determined in Step 1452, Step 1454, or Step 1458, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the accessory continuous action device operation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1503, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1503, in step 1504, the special game control means MP30 determines the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, in step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1600). Note that if the answer is No in step 1502 or 1503, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the accessory continuous action device operation flag is off. . In the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the special game control means MP30 turns on the accessory continuous action device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1610, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( The control command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1990), and the process proceeds to step 1614.

  Next, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1614, that is, when it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1616, the special game execution means MP33 is set to the release pattern set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (for example, keeps releasing). Open pattern and open / close pattern). Next, in step 1618, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1622, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big prize opening electric combination C11d (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d) and the first big prize opening C10 (or the second large prize opening). The winning opening C20) is opened, and a special game timer MP34t (particularly, an opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and started. Next, in step 1623, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the flag during the first (second) big prize opening validity period in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 1624. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1614, that is, when the big prize opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1624 without performing the processing of steps 1616 to 1623.

  Next, in step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current round number, game ball winning number, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Next, in step 1625, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the waiting-in-game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1625, in step 1626, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, the predetermined number of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20). It is determined whether there are (for example, 10 balls) winning balls. If Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1626, in step 1627, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer) and the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) relating to the special prize opening is determined. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1627, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1627, the process returns to the caller of this subroutine.

  Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 sets the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). The process of stopping the driving and closing the first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) (the process related to closing is executed in this process, but actually transmitting a control command to the device) Is executed in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Next, in step 1629, the special game executing means MP33 starts by setting the big winning opening entrance waiting time (3 seconds in this example) to the big winning entrance entrance waiting timer MP34t3. Next, in step 1630, the special game executing means MP33 turns on the waiting-in-game flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1631. Note that if the answer is No in step 1625, the process proceeds to step 1631.

  Next, in step 1631, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the big winning opening entrance waiting timer and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1631, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the waiting-in-game flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the flag during the first (second) big prize opening validity period in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1634, the special game executing means MP33 resets the release timer MP34t2. Next, in step 1635, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1638, in step 1640, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the accessory continuous action device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1642, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1644, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) to end the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1990). In step 1700, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900). It should be noted that even if No in Step 1602, Step 1631, or Step 1638, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, at step 1702, the specific game control means MP50 determines that the stopped jackpot symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (the main game symbol that becomes a probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game. In this example, 5A / 5B / 7A / 7B ). In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1708. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1702, in Step 1706, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) to the counter value of the hour / minute number counter MP52c, and proceeds to Step 1708. Next, in step 1708 and step 1710, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next processing (step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraud radio sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraud radio sensor is ON continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). The purpose of this process is to eliminate the influence of noise by determining whether or not a predetermined number of interrupts are continuously ON. In the following, the process in FIG. The case of “continuous for a predetermined number of times” has the same purpose). In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that an illegal radio wave has been detected, turns on the illegal radio wave detection flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb, Control goes to step 1912. On the other hand, if NO in step 1902, in step 1906, fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraud sensor, and determines whether or not the input from the fraud sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of fraudulent radio waves has ended, and turns off the fraud detection flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1912. Note that if the result of Step 1906 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1912.

  Next, in step 1912, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in Step 1912, in Step 1914, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that fraud magnetism has been detected, turns on the fraud magnetism detection flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb, Control goes to step 1922. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1912, in step 1916, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is continuously OFF a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of fraud magnetism has ended, and turns off the fraud magnetism detection flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1922. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1916, the process proceeds to Step 1922.

  Next, in step 1922, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is ON continuously for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns on the door open flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Step 1932 follows. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1922, in step 1926, fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1926, the fraud detection information management means ME determines in step 1928 that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns off the door open flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Step 1932 follows. Note that if the answer is No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

  Next, in step 1932, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been released and turns on the open frame flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1934. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1932, in step 1936, the fraud detection information management unit ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been released, and turns off the open frame flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1950). Even in the case of No in step 1936, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1950).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of error management processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the error management means determines whether or not an error occurrence condition has been satisfied (for errors that may occur and control when an error occurs, see FIGS. 73 and 74). In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the error management means transmits a command (command to the sub side) indicating that an error has occurred and the error type information (sub main control by the control command transmission process of step 1990). Part SM). Next, in step 1956, the error management means determines whether or not the error cancellation condition is satisfied (see also FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 for the error cancellation condition and the control at the time of error cancellation). In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the error management means transmits a command (command to the sub side) relating to the information that the error has been released (sub main control unit SM by the control command transmission process of step 1990). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3000). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3000) also in the case of No in step 1952 or step 1956.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of prize ball payout command transmission control processing according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes a payout control board transmission control process to be described later. Next, at step 3200, the main control board M executes a payout control board reception control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 30 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3105, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the input port of the second line (a line for transmitting an ON / OFF signal relating to whether or not a prize ball is being paid out) and determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF. That is, it is determined whether or not a payout is not currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb, and issues an unpaid prize ball (still prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side). It is determined whether there is a prize ball that has not been transmitted. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb, and a prize ball payout related error (it is an error that is inappropriate for paying a prize ball) ( For example, it is determined whether or not an error relating to a failure of the payout motor, a full upper tray, a ball running out error, or the like has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj corresponds to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the current payout process is executed, which is temporarily stored in the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. The award ball payout commands (see FIG. 31) corresponding to the number of the winning balls are set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb. In step 3125, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj deletes the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the currently set prize ball payout command from the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb and shifts the subsequent information. Execute. Next, in step 3130, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj transmits the prize ball payout command set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb to the prize ball payout control board KH side for the next process (the payout control board in step 3200). (Receive control processing). Note that, also in the case of No in step 3105, step 3110, and step 3115, the processing shifts to the next processing (anti-payout control board reception control processing in step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information transmitted / received between main control board / payout control board >>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the present embodiment includes specific information indicating that it is a prize ball payout command and information on the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed to 1001 (identification information indicating that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls. For example, 0 (0000B) means 0 prize balls and 15 (1111A) means 15 prize balls. .

  Next, payout related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M will be described. Here, as an example, the payout related information (award ball payout related information or payout abnormality related information) is a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, pan full error and prize ball payout completion information. The details of each error will be described later. If the bit corresponding to each error is “0”, it means that the error has not occurred. If it is “1”, the error has occurred. Means that has occurred. Bit 0 relates to the completion of prize ball payout, “0” means that the prize ball has been paid out, and “1” means that the prize ball has not been paid out.

  Next, FIG. 32 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 in FIG. First, in step 3205, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb and determines whether or not payout related information has been received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the fraud detection information management means ME has error information (out of ball error, upper tray full error, other payout related errors) in the received payout related information. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb and turns on the error flag relating to the corresponding error, thereby paying out a prize ball. Error information on the control board KH side is also managed (unified management) on the main control board M side. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3210, in step 3220, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb and sets an error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Turn off. In step 3225, the payout information transmitting / receiving means MHsj determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout related information. In the case of Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj clears the prize ball payout command (the prize ball payout command relating to the completion of the current payout) set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb. (The process of step 3500). It should be noted that, also in the case of No in step 3205 and step 3225, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3502, the external signal output control means MG refers to the gaming state temporary storage means MB and confirms the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3504, the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and sends it to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output through the external relay terminal board G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the same figure (image diagram of signal output). The external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal portions to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information relating to award ball payout, information relating to winning or symbol stop, current gaming state (normal gaming state, Error information for outputting various error information detected by the opening detection sensor when the door is opened, the terminal for gaming state information output for outputting information on specific gaming state, special gaming state, etc.) Output terminals and the like} are provided. As will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are configured to be capable of outputting information from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC by being connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout related information, which is information output from the winning ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal that outputs a signal during a big hit at the time of a big hit (a plurality of jacks depending on the type of the big hit) ), A door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a start opening winning output terminal that outputs a signal when winning at the starting opening, and a shortage of balls in the prize ball tank KT Game-related information, which is important information for game hall operators, such as a terminal for outputting a signal when the ball is out and a terminal for outputting a special symbol when outputting a signal when the special symbol is stopped. This is an output terminal. That is, the output terminal for the payout related information is set as one output terminal, so that it is possible to avoid the exhaustion of the output terminals for these important game related information.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. Yes. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

  Here, the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, between the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board. G and Hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is constituted by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. I don't mean. That is, an electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is ON / OFF) by the unit, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. When the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, whereby the output terminal and the hall computer HC are brought into conduction. In addition, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the output terminal and the hall computer HC are not electrically connected by returning the contact portion G2 to the open state. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G can be obtained by detecting the conduction period. With this configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote operation goto) that illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing the go-to action, but is not limited to this, for example, a pair of light emitting units and A photo sensor having a light receiving unit is also configured to enable one-way communication (for example, light from a light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by a hall computer HC). It is supplemented that the signal can be received by reading with the unit.

  However, since the structure is once replaced with a physical signal (switch state is ON / OFF), the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC with one of the external relay terminal boards G. It is difficult to transmit complex information using an input / output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, an output terminal for the number of special symbol determination times, It is customary to configure such that “only information indicating that one variation of a special symbol has ended” can be transmitted).

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, other signals; a preliminary signal that outputs that the signal is always off is; any timing after power-on {eg, (a) start of execution of main processing on main control board side in FIG. 8); It is a signal that always outputs an off signal. In addition, the said signal is a signal from which the presence or absence of use changes according to every development model (complexity of game play).

  Next, it is an IN / OUT signal; the number of game balls that have entered all the entrances (including the out entrances) arranged on the game area D30 (≈the number of game balls that have been driven into the game area D30) ) Is output; the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s (for example, the value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, but may be the value of the number of incoming balls counter MJ10c) Is a signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an OFF signal for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

  Next, it is an IN / OUT signal; a signal that outputs the number of game balls paid out by the gaming machine; every time the number of game balls detected by the payout count sensor KE10s reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10) A signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an OFF signal for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. In addition, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after a predetermined period (one interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and when the next output is awaited. May be configured to start output immediately after the current output period expires (even if the predetermined period does not elapse).

  Next, it is a signal of the unit monitoring system; a signal that outputs that the glass door of the gaming machine (the frame body on which the transparent plate is mounted, for example, the glass door D18) is being opened; When the sensor D18s changes from off to on (for example, when the door open flag is turned on in step 1924) {* However, after the change from off to on, the sensor D18s remains on for a predetermined period (0.1 second). The output timing may be continuous}; during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the door open flag is on), it is a signal that always outputs an on signal. → After changing to OFF, the ON signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 second) elapses}.

  Next, it is a signal of the unit monitoring system; a signal that outputs that the front frame of the gaming machine (the frame body on which the game board is mounted, for example, the front frame unit D14) is open; When the opening detection sensor D14s changes from off to on (for example, when the frame open flag is turned on at step 1934) {* However, after changing from off to on, the opening detection sensor D14s is on for a predetermined period (0.1 second). May be output timing}; during a period in which the detection sensor is on (for example, during a period in which the frame open flag is on), a signal that always outputs an on signal {* After changing from ON to OFF, the ON signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 second) elapses}.

  Next, it is a signal of the unit monitoring system; a signal that outputs that the tray frame of the gaming machine (the frame body on which the ball tray is mounted and the ball tray unit D17) is being opened; a ball tray unit open detection sensor When D20s changes from off to on {* However, the output timing may be that the on state continues for a predetermined period (0.1 second) after changing from off to on}; the detection sensor is on During the period, it is a signal that always outputs an ON signal. {However, after changing from ON to OFF, the ON signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 second) elapses}.

  Here, the signals of the three types of unit monitoring systems may be the same output signal according to the configuration between the units. In that case, it is only necessary to continue outputting the ON signal while any of the open detection sensors is ON. Further, the opening detection sensor of each unit may be connected to the main control board M or may be connected to the prize ball payout control board KH (the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH). Because two-way communication is possible).

  Next, it is a signal of the symbol variation system; the signal that outputs the number of symbol variations for all the symbol variation that triggers the opening of the big prize opening (attacker); the first main game symbol or the second main signal When the game symbol change display ends (for example, when the changing flag is turned on from step 1424) {* After the change display ends, the period during which the symbols are fixedly displayed ends ( Alternatively, the output timing may be set when the period is started or during the period}; a signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.5 seconds. The output period is preferably configured to be shorter than the shortest possible period of the variable display period of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Moreover, you may comprise so that the said signal may be output during the period during the fluctuation fixed time of a main game symbol.

  Next, it is a signal of the symbol variation system; a part of the symbol variation (for example, symbol variation on the second main game side) that triggers the opening of the big prize opening (attacker) is output, and the number of symbol variations is output. When the change display of the second main game symbol is finished (for example, when the changing flag is turned on in step 1424 in the second main game display processing) {* When the period during which the symbol is fixedly displayed is completed (or when it is started, it is during the period) may be set as the output timing}; a signal for outputting an ON signal for 0.5 seconds It is. The output period is preferably configured to be shorter than the shortest period that the variable display period of the second main game symbol can take.

  Next, it is a signal of a big hit system; a signal that outputs that it is during a period in which the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (in the operation of the accessory continuous operation device); when a special game is started (for example, In step 1606, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned off → on, but in step 1432, the condition device operation flag may be turned off → on)) {* Before starting the start demonstration period, During the period, the output timing may be the output timing}; during the period when the special game is being executed (for example, during the period when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag or the condition device operation flag is ON) This is a signal to be output.

  Next, it is a signal of a big hit system; it is during the period when the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (during operation of the accessory continuous operation device), and the pattern fluctuation that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker) Is a signal that outputs that the time-saving game is in progress (the variable time-shortening function is in operation); when a special game is started (for example, in the case where the action consecutive action device operation flag is turned off to on in step 1606) Or when the condition device operation flag is turned off → on in step 1432), and when the time saving game is started (for example, when the main game time short flag is turned off → on in step 1708, and / or In step 1710, if the auxiliary game short time flag is turned off to on); during a period in which the special game is being executed (for example, the continuous action device activation flag and / or the condition device activation) During the period in which the lag is on) and during the period in which the time reduction game is being executed (for example, during the period in which the main game short flag and / or the auxiliary game short flag is on), the always-on signal is output. Signal.

  Next, there are other signals; information for uniquely identifying the gaming machine is output {* gaming machine manufacturer identification code (2 bytes), gaming machine model name identification code (64 bytes), main board CPU Specific information (chip code register value = 4 bytes) in sequence} is a signal; any timing (eg, power supply) after power-on {eg, (a) start of execution of main process on main control board side in FIG. 8) About 10 seconds after the input); the unique information divided into one frame (start bit 1 bit + data bit 8 bits + parity bit 1 bit + stop bit 1 bit) is converted into a serial transmission method (start-stop synchronization, This signal is output during a period until all data is output at 200 bps). Note that it is preferable that the signal format (rated voltage, rated current) is different from other signal types.

  Next, it is an IN / OUT system signal; a signal for outputting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out from the gaming machine; When detected, the number of prize balls to be paid out is totaled, and every time the total number of prize balls (for example, the value of the prize ball number counter MHc) reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10); This is a signal for outputting an OFF signal for 0.1 second after an ON signal is output. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. In addition, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after a predetermined period (one interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and when the next output is awaited. May be configured to start output immediately after the current output period expires (even if the predetermined period does not elapse).

  Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that the RAM initialization operation has been performed in the gaming machine is; power-on accompanied by the RAM initialization operation (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1002) This is a signal for outputting an ON signal for 0.2 seconds after an arbitrary timing after {after the elapse of a predetermined period (one interrupt = 0.004 seconds) after power-on}. The output period may be the same as the output period in the IN / OUT system or the winning detection system.

  Next, it is a security signal; a period other than the period during which the special winning opening (attacker) can be opened (from the operation of the special electric accessory until the elapse of a predetermined period after the operation ends) (for example, the first (second) ) In the period in which the flag during the grand prize winning period is OFF}, it is output that a winning prize (an attacker, for example, the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) is detected. The signal to be played is; during the period other than the execution period of each round in the special game (including the discharge waiting period and the period between rounds) {for example, the period during which the flag during the first (second) big prize opening period is off} When a game ball is detected by the ball sensor at the winning opening (for example, when it is determined No in step 2305); after an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, 0.2 seconds Output an off signal. It is a signal. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

  Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there was a magnet sensor error (the sensor that detects the approach of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism); when the signal from the magnet sensor is turned on ( For example, if the incorrect magnetic detection flag is turned on in step 1914) {* However, if it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after it is turned on, the output timing is satisfied. No}; a signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.2 seconds. Note that the output periods are configured not to overlap due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period.

  Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there is a radio sensor error (the sensor that senses the radio wave has detected an abnormal radio wave); when the signal from the radio sensor is turned on (for example, In the case where the illegal radio wave detection flag is turned off to on in step 1904) {* However, if it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after it is turned on, the output timing is not satisfied} A signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.2 seconds. Note that the output periods are configured not to overlap due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period.

  Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there is a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves) on the payout control board side (for example, prize ball payout control board KH) When the signal from the radio wave sensor input to the payout control board side is turned on (for example, when the information related to the radio wave detection error from the prize ball payout control board KH is confirmed in step 3215). When the signal is turned on again within a predetermined period (one second) after the signal is turned on, the output timing is not satisfied}; a signal for outputting an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Note that the output periods cannot overlap due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period. Further, a command indicating that the signal from the radio wave sensor is turned on is transmitted from the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH) to the main control board (for example, the main control board M), The main control board that has received the command may be configured to output a signal.

  Next, it is a security signal; illegal entry to each winning opening targeted for paying out a prize ball (for example, more than a predetermined number of entries within a predetermined time, and the incoming detection sensor continues ON for a predetermined time or more. , The number of balls entered in the special prize opening during the special game is more than the predetermined number determined for each execution mode of the special game, the number of balls exceeding the design value during a certain valid game period, etc.) The signal that outputs: After one entry is detected by the switch for detecting entry to each prize opening, the events that detected one entry again within a predetermined period for each prize opening are predetermined in total. If it occurs more than once, and 2. 2. a switch for detecting the entrance to each winning opening, when the entrance is continuously detected for a predetermined period; During the execution of a special game (for example, 16 rounds of big hit), when the number of balls detected by the ball sensor at the big prize opening exceeds a prescribed number (for example, 160) throughout the period, When any one of 1 to 3 is satisfied; an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, and then an OFF signal is output for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. In the case of 3, it is preferable that the prescribed number is varied according to the execution contents of the special game (Example 1: When the maximum number of rounds is 10, the prescribed number = 100. Example 2: The above-mentioned 3 is not applied when the big winning opening only performs short opening.

  Next, it is a security signal; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed in the gaming machine, and the illegal act that can be detected by the gaming machine {for example, illegal prize winning ... More than a predetermined number (5) of balls entered into the big prize opening (attacker) during periods other than the period during which it can be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated), or the ordinary electric accessory cannot be released During the period, a predetermined number (5) or more of balls entering the ordinary electric accessory were detected. Radio wave sensor error: A sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves, or the sensor is not connected. Board switch error: The proximity of the object is detected by the proximity sensor provided on the game board. Magnet sensor error: The sensor that detects the approach of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism, or the signal that outputs that the sensor is not connected, etc.} is: 1. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1002); 2. when detecting the fraud (illegal prize 1, radio wave sensor error); When any of 1 to 3 is satisfied at the time of detecting the fraud (board switch error, magnet sensor error); in the case 1, the ON signal is output for the first period (30 seconds). In the case of 2, the on signal is output over the second period (30 seconds), and in the case of 3, the on signal is output over the third period (during detection of each fraud). Signal. When the output periods overlap, all the output periods are overlapped, and the output of the ON signal is maintained until all the output periods expire. Further, the output period may be different between the case 1 and the case 2 above.

  Next, there are security-related signals; that a RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, and an illegal act that can be detected by the gaming machine {for example, an abnormal winning error ... a big winning mouth (attacker) During periods other than the period during which the electric motor can be opened (when the special electric instrument is in operation), during which the normal electric instrument cannot be opened (predetermined immediately after closing) In other cases, it was detected that the ball was entering a normal electric accessory. Magnet sensor error: The sensor that detects the approach of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism, etc. Ejection error: Number of balls detected by the switch for detecting the entrance to each entrance that is the target for paying out a prize ball, and a switch for checking the entrance downstream of the switch (particularly the figure) Although not shown, it is detected by a switch through which a game ball entering each entrance passes, and is detected by one or a plurality of switches different from the switch for detecting entry into each entrance. The signal that outputs that the difference from the number of entered balls exceeds the predetermined number (100), etc.} is performed; 1. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1002); 2. when detecting the fraud (abnormal winning error, magnet sensor error); When the fraud (discharge error) is detected; in the cases 1 and 2, an on signal is output for 0.2 seconds, and then an off signal is output for 0.2 seconds. In this case, the ON signal is output until the next 1 is satisfied. If the output period overlaps (other than 3), the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, even in the output period related to 1 and 2, the output of the ON signal is maintained when the output timing related to 3 is reached, and the output related to 1 and 2 is output during the output period related to 3 Even when the timing comes, the output of the ON signal is maintained.

  Next, a signal of a winning detection system; a signal for outputting the number of times of entering a ball for each starting port for all starting ports related to symbol variation that triggers opening of a large winning port (attacker); When one entry is detected with a switch for detecting entry into the 1 main game start opening, and the second main game start opening (one with an electric accessory mounted, When one entry is detected by a switch for detecting entry to (one that is not mounted) (for example, when the first main game start flag is turned off to on in step 2206, Or, when the second main game start flag is changed from OFF to ON in step 2226); after the ON signal is output for 0.1 seconds, the OFF signal is output for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. In addition, when an illegal entry to the second main game start opening (the one in which the electric accessory is mounted) is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied by using the entry.

  Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process described later with the main control board M. Next, in step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting a prize ball payout / starting motor driving), which will be described later. Next, in step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor driving and at the end of prize ball payout), which will be described later. Next, in step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive execution) described later. In step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a motor error process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 4100.

  Here, referring to the block diagram on the right side of the figure, the prize ball payout control board KH of the gaming machine in this embodiment controls the transmission and reception of commands and information with the main control board M side, the card unit R side, and the like. Transmission / reception control means 3100 for controlling the game, error control means 3200 for executing error control related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of game balls in response to the prize ball payout command and the lending command Payout control means 3300 for executing the payout process. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the transmission / reception control means 3100 transmits information to the reception control means 3110 that controls reception of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R, and to the main control board M and the card unit R. Transmission control means 3120 for controlling the control.

  Here, the reception control unit 3110 further includes a main-side reception control unit 3111 that controls reception of information (for example, commands) from the main control board M. The main-side reception control unit 3111 further includes a main-side reception information temporary storage unit 3111a in which information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. The transmission control unit 3120 further includes a payout-related error information temporary storage unit 3121 that temporarily stores error information related to a payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side.

  Next, the error control means 3200 detects an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing an on / off state of an error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a payout motor operation abnormality is detected. Error control means 3230 when detecting a payout motor operation abnormality that controls error control at the time, error control means 3240 when detecting a payout abnormality that controls error control when a payout abnormality is detected, and error when a ball path abnormality is detected Error control means 3250 for detecting a ball path abnormality detecting control, error control means 3260 for detecting a payout motor abnormality detecting error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality relating to a prize ball payout operation is detected. Error control means 3270 at the time of payout stop abnormality detection that controls the error control at the time of being played and a ball biting error of the prize ball payout unit KE10 occurs A ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t for managing the error notification period, and a non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 for managing the error notification period when a non-passing error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs. Yes. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 further includes an unauthorized payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times the discharge motor operation abnormality is detected. Further, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 further includes an excessive payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of excessive prize balls. The ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further includes a payout interval extension control means 3251 for executing a payout interval time extension process related to prize ball payout. The payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further includes a retry operation control means 3261 for executing a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

  Next, the payout control means 3300 has payout process related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310 is a payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 for temporarily storing a state related to payout (for example, whether payout is being performed or whether a payout abnormality has occurred). The payout counter 3312 in which the number of game balls to be paid out is set during the payout process, the step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven by the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. In this case, the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the excited stator, and a predetermined time (waiting for ball passing) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation) Sphere passing waiting timer 3315 for measuring time / motor stop time) and payout by unit payout operation A unit payout counter 3317 which game balls speed is set can further have. Here, in this embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrementing timer and is configured to stop when the timer value reaches 0, but is not limited thereto, and is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure using a timer. Hereinafter, each subroutine will be described in detail.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4100 in FIG. First, in step 4110, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of detecting a dispensing motor operation abnormality, which will be described later. Next, in step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes a payout abnormality detection error control process to be described later. Next, in step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes a ball path abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes a payout motor abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of detecting a required payout stop abnormality, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (a prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process in step 4200).

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of detecting a dispensing motor operation abnormality according to the subroutine of step 4110 in FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of occurrences of an abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality described later is detected, and to flag an error when the number of occurrences of the abnormality exceeds a threshold. Is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passing of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s in a situation where the prize ball payout process is not executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. It is a flag that is turned on in the case of failure (dispensing motor operation abnormality) In the case of Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 increments the counter value of the unauthorized payout accumulation counter 3231 by one. Next, at step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the counter value of the illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). To do. If Yes in step 4114, the payout motor operation error detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4115, and the process proceeds to step 4116. Note that if the result is No in step 4111 or step 4114, the process proceeds to step 4116.

  Next, at step 4116, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 sets the payout motor operation error in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 as the payout related error information, and performs the following processing ( Then, the process proceeds to step 4120 (error control process at the time of dispensing abnormality detection). Even in the case of No in step 4116, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of payout abnormality detection in step 4120).

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of payout abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4120 in FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of payouts of excessive game balls due to the abnormality when a payout abnormality described later is detected, and when the count number exceeds a threshold value, It is to turn on a flag indicating that an error has occurred. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout abnormality detection flag exceeds the predetermined number of award balls paid out based on the command transmitted from the main control board M side, and the payout of excessive game balls is detected (payout). It is a flag that is turned on (abnormal). In the case of Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the error control means 3240 at the time of the abnormality in detecting the payout acquires the excessive payout number temporarily stored in the payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310, and stores the excessive payout number in the excessive payout cumulative counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excess payout cumulative counter 3241 and determines whether or not the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. In the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4125, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 turns on the excessive payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4126. Note that if the result of Step 4121 or Step 4124 is No, the process proceeds to Step 4126. Note that the excessive payout error (the state where the excessive payout error flag is on) is configured to be resolved only by turning on the power again, but this example is merely an example, and is not limited thereto. For example, the error may be eliminated by pressing an error release switch or elapse of a predetermined time.

  Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excessive payout error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 sets the excessive payout error as the payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 and performs the next processing (in step 4140). The process proceeds to error control processing when a ball path abnormality is detected. Even in the case of No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4140 error control process at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality according to the subroutine of step 4140 in FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to detect an abnormal ball path (to be described later). (1) A game ball does not exist in the award ball tank KT or the award ball payout unit KE10 (out of ball) abnormality has occurred. Or if an abnormality corresponding to a shortage of balls or a shortage of abnormalities is detected while investigating whether a small amount of game balls (shortage of balls) has occurred in the prize ball payout unit KE10 , Turning on the flag indicating the error occurrence. In addition, (2) when an abnormality corresponding to a ball shortage abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is detected, the waiting time until the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is resolved by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout Is to create. First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag is at the end of execution of a predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) scheduled on the winning ball payout control board KH side, and the motor drive operates normally. This flag is turned on when a situation in which the payout is less than the predetermined number is detected under the situation where it is determined that the payout has been made. In the case of Yes in step 4141, in step 4142, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the occurrence condition of a ball break abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the occurrence condition of the ball breakage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is not particularly limited. For example, a detection sensor for a game ball is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10. An example of a condition where a ball breakage abnormality has occurred when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected, or a ball flow path directly above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball flow paths are provided) An example can be given in which a detection sensor for a game ball is provided for each of the “existence”, and when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, an abnormality of a shortage of balls has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4143, in step 4144, the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 turns on the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. Note that if the result of step 4141 or step 4143 is No, the process proceeds to step 4151.

  Next, in step 4151, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting the ball path abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4151, in step 4152, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not a condition for eliminating a ball break abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the conditions for eliminating the ball breakage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality are not particularly limited, and an example in which the abnormality is resolved when the occurrence condition of the above-mentioned ball breakage abnormality or ball shortage abnormality is not satisfied. Can be mentioned. In the case of Yes in step 4152, in step 4153, the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 turns off the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. In step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 determines the excitation timing during normal operation (for example, 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms to continuously excite a predetermined number of payout operations at one speed) or ball A passage waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (error control processing at the time of detection of a dispensing motor abnormality in step 4170). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4152, in step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 determines the excitation timing and the ball passing waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball is relatively low compared to the normal operation. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of detection of a dispensing motor abnormality in step 4170). Even in the case of No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of detection of a dispensing motor abnormality in step 4170). Here, the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited. For example, after a payout operation for one sphere is executed at a speed of 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is waited. An example can be given in which the excitation timing is changed so that the payout operation is executed once again at a speed of 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms after the waiting time has elapsed. Further, the waiting time for changing the ball passing is not particularly limited (for example, changing from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of detection of the dispensing motor abnormality according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a payout motor abnormality to be described later is detected, and to return to a retry operation of the payout motor (stepping motor KE10m in the winning ball payout unit KE10). It is to execute a switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to an external factor such as a ball bite. In the case of Yes in step 4171, in step 4172, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, at step 4173, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets the payout motor error as the payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121. Then, in step 4176, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Note that if the result of Step 4171 is No, the process proceeds to Step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting a retry operation in a standby state for a predetermined time after the occurrence of a motor error, which will be described later, and providing a waiting time for eliminating the motor error within the predetermined time.

  Next, at step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4177, in step 4178, the retry operation control unit 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4178, the retry operation control unit 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4179. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as a step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Here, the predetermined number of steps at the time of the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example in which the same number as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10 ms at the time of the retry operation described later can be given. Next, in step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control means 3261 switches the excitation speed for the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, the well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) and the switching speed for one step for the retry operation (for example, 6 ms). Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) in the ball passage waiting timer 3315 as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control unit 3261 turns on the retry operation execution flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311. In step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and proceeds to the next processing (error control processing at the time of payout stop abnormality detection in step 4190). To do. Note that, also in the case of No in step 4177 or step 4178, the processing shifts to the next processing (error control processing at the time of payout stop abnormality detection in step 4190).

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of detecting a required payout stop abnormality according to the subroutine of step 4190 in FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and The award ball payout process cannot be continued until the abnormality is resolved. Here, the fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the winning ball payout process includes an abnormal communication between the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH, an abnormal communication between the card unit R and the winning ball payout control board KH, and payout. Examples include a sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s, a tray (upper plate) full tank abnormality, and the like. First, in step 4191-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection sets the error continuation time (for example, 120 seconds) to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200 t and starts it, Control goes to step 4192-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, error control means 3270 at the time of required payout stop abnormality detection refers to ball biting error occurrence timer 3200 t and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. If YES in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and goes to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4191-3, the process proceeds to step 4192-1.

  Next, at step 4192-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the switch non-passing error detection flag has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage stop abnormality detection sets the error duration (for example, 120 seconds) to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2, and starts it. Control goes to step 4193-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2, and determines whether the timer value is 0 or not. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection turns off the switch non-passing error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 41933-1 Migrate to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4192-3, the process proceeds to step 4193-1.

  Next, in Step 4193-1, the error control unit 3270 upon detection of required payout stop abnormality determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a has been pressed. In the case of Yes in step 4193-1, in step 4193-2 to step 4193-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection, the error-related flag including an error cancellation condition including the pressing of the error cancellation switch KH3a ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, the payout operation incomplete game ball detection flag, the payout motor error flag, and the switch non-passing error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4194-1. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

  Next, at step 4194-1, the required payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, error control means 3270 at the time of payout stop abnormality detection turns on the communication error flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221 and proceeds to step 4195-1. . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the required payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

  Next, at step 4195-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 detects a sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or more). It is determined whether or not there has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4196- Move to 1.

  Next, at step 4196-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of a required payout stop abnormality detection determines whether or not a tray (upper dish) full tank abnormality has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the error control means 3270 upon detection of a required payout stop abnormality turns on the saucer full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4197-1. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4196-1, in step 4196-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage stop abnormality detection turns off the pan full error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4197- Move to 1.

  Next, in step 4197-1, the required payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a card unit R connection abnormality is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection turns on the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 418-1. Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection turns off the CR unit unconnected error flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221, and in step 4198. To -1.

  Next, at step 418-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and refers to a part of the error relating to the payout operation stop (for example, excessive payout error, prize ball apparatus) It is determined whether all flags relating to error, payout motor operation error, game ball detection when payout operation is not completed, payout motor error, switch non-passing error) are off.

  In the case of Yes in Step 4198-1, in Step 4198-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of payout stop abnormality detection refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and refers to the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, the saucer full tank. It is determined whether all error flags of the error flag and the CR unit unconnected error flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 executes a normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, a payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). Is temporarily stopped, the payout operation is resumed), and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, error control means 3270 at the time of payout stop abnormality detection forcibly pauses the payout operation in payout control means 3300, and next The process proceeds to (the process of step 4200).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of prize ball payout related information reception processing (vs. main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 in FIG. Here, the first half of the flow is information reception processing from the main control board M (and processing for setting the number of prize balls to be paid), and the second half of the flow is information transmission processing to the main control board M. Accordingly, the information receiving process from the main control board M in the first half (and the process of setting the number of winning ball payouts associated therewith) will be described. First, in step 4205, the main side receiving control means 3111 is the payout state flag temporary storage means. Referring to 3311, it is determined whether or not the winning ball payout flag is off. Here, the “Prize ball paying out flag” means that when the pay ball paying process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in driving operation, or when the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time) This flag turns on when In the case of Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main side reception control means 3111 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a and determines whether or not a prize ball payout command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, in step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of prize balls to be paid this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main-side received information temporary storage means 3111a, and the prize ball number information Is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). This completes the process of setting the number of prize balls to be paid when the normal prize ball payout process is executed. Note that the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225) also in the case of No in step 4205 and step 4210.

  Next, the process of transmitting information to the main control board M will be described. First, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 to determine whether or not the payout related error transmission flag is on. Determine. Here, the “payout-related error transmission flag” means that the above-mentioned payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. This flag is turned on and turned off after the error notification is made on the main control board side. In the case of Yes in step 4225, in step 4230, the error control means 3200 turns off the payout related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. In step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout-related error information set in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and proceeds to the next process (step 4240). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (step 4240) also in the case of No in step 4225.

  Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the “prize ball payout completion flag” is a flag that is turned on when it is determined by the payout control means 3300 that the prize ball payout has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 4240, in step 4245, the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the winning ball payout completion flag. In step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information indicating that the winning ball payout has been completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {the winning ball payout control process in step 4300 (the winning ball payout start).・ When starting motor drive}. Even in the case of No in step 4240, the process proceeds to the next process {award ball payout control process in step 4300 (at the start of a prize ball payout / motor drive)}. The winning ball payout completion information transmission process is thus completed.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting a prize ball payout / starting motor driving) according to the subroutine of step 4300 in FIG. Here, this process is a process prior to the execution of the motor drive process in the next step 4400, and the number of motor drive steps and the like are set in response to receiving a prize ball payout command from the main control board side. It is processing to do. First, in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 in FIG. 42) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, in step 4310 and step 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to turn on the winning ball payout flag and turn off the winning ball payout start permission flag. To do.

  Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of award balls set in the payout counter 3312 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 3). In the case of Yes in step 4320, in step 4325, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that a predetermined number of payouts are paid, and the process proceeds to step 4332. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of winning ball payouts set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out. The process moves to 4332.

  Next, in step 4332, the payout control means 3300 sets the payout planned number in this unit payout operation (that is, the payout number scheduled in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j). Here, the excitation stator position specifying counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and “0” corresponds to the default position at the time of standby (pause). Next, in step 4337, the payout control means 3300 switches the normal operation excitation method (for example, the well-known 2-2 phase excitation method) and the normal operation one step switching speed (for example, 3 ms) for the stepping motor operation. ) Is set. Next, in step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) in the ball passage waiting timer 3315 as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation. Next, in step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation execution flag. Here, the retry operation execution flag is a flag that is turned on during execution of the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation as described above. In step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and proceeds to the next process {the award ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / award). At the end of ball payout)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4305, in step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4345, since the motor has already been driven, the process proceeds to the next process {Step 4400 prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive completion / end of prize ball payout)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4345, in step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is OFF. Here, the winning ball payout continuation flag is after the stepping motor operation for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation, and when the winning ball payout operation should be continued when the ball passing waiting time / motor rest time elapses ( A detailed condition is described later. In the case of Yes in step 4350, the process proceeds to the next process {award ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor driving / end of a prize ball payout)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4350, in step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. In step 4354, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317, and determines whether or not the counter value exceeds 0 (that is, the payout amount for the current unit payout operation has not been paid out). Or not). In the case of Yes in step 4354, in step 4356, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4354, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the winning ball payout continuation flag is on, the process of setting the number of steps of motor driving and the like is executed again without receiving the winning ball payout command from the main control board side, If it is determined that all of the scheduled payout amount due to the current unit payout operation has not been paid out, the occurrence of an abnormality that causes a ball shortage error or a ball shortage error is detected.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of prize ball payout control processing (at the end of motor driving / end of prize ball payout) according to the subroutine of step 4400 in FIG. Here, the process is an end process when the driving end of all the motors scheduled in the previous process (step 4300) is executed or when all the prize ball payouts scheduled are executed. . Here, motor drive end processing is executed from step 4402 to step 4419, game ball detection processing is executed from step 4420 to step 4425, and prize ball payout end processing is executed from step 4430 to step 4462.

  First, the motor drive end process will be described. First, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to determine whether or not the winning ball payout flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4405, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4405, in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 and determines whether or not the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. It is determined whether all the number of steps in the current unit payout operation set in step 4325 or step 4330 has been executed. If Yes in step 4410, in step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 in step 4417, turns off the retry operation execution flag, and proceeds to step 4418. On the other hand, if No in step 4416, the process proceeds to step 4418. Next, at step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the stepping motor in a resting state (in this example, the excitation output is lowered and the current excitation stator position specifying counter value (j) is continuously excited). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315, and proceeds to step 4420. Note that if the result is No in step 4405 or 4410, the process also proceeds to step 4420. This completes the motor drive end process.

  Next, game ball detection processing will be described. First, at step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. If Yes in step 4420, the payout control unit 3300 decrements the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317 by 1 in step 4422. Next, in step 4425, the payout control means 3300 decrements the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312 by 1 and proceeds to step 4430. Note that if the result is No in step 4420, the process proceeds to step 4430. In this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented (decremented) every time a ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of game balls are detected. In such a case, a value corresponding to the number of entered balls may be subtracted. This is the end of the game ball detection process.

  Next, the winning ball payout end process will be described. First, in step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes in step 4430, in step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4431 (that is, when the number of game balls related to the payout is detected by the sensor even though the driving of the motor related to the payout has not ended), in step 4432, The payout control means 3300 turns on the game ball detection flag at the time of payout incomplete in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to Step 4435. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4431, the process proceeds to step 4435.

  Next, in Step 4435 and Step 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to turn off the winning ball paying-out flag and turn on the winning ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than zero. In the case of Yes in step 4441, in step 4442, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and, based on the count value, determines the excess payout number (for example, if the counter value is −3, the excessive payout number is 3). The information is temporarily stored in the information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {the prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive execution) in step 4500}. In the case of No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and a predetermined payout number is normally paid out), the next process {the prize ball payout control process in step 4500) (During motor drive execution)}. In this example, the excess payout is detected when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the motor driving related to payout ends. Detection of excessive payout (value of payout counter 3312 is less than 0) when a predetermined time (for example, a sufficient detection waiting time until a game ball paid out by the driving is detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has elapsed. (I.e., an excess payout is an unexpected situation in which the number of game balls exceeding the number of game balls to be paid out has been paid out). This means that this unforeseen situation, which is extremely unlikely to occur by design, means that a malfunction has occurred in one of the payout mechanisms, or fraudulent activity has occurred during the payout operation. Done Likely it means the high thing).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4430, in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control means 3300 turns on the switch non-passing error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Even if the ball passing waiting time has elapsed, if no game balls are detected for the number of game balls related to the payout operation, it is immediately determined that a switch non-passing error has occurred. The present invention is not limited, and it may be determined that a switch non-passing error has occurred when the event occurs a plurality of times).

  Next, in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs during motor driving as described above. In the case of Yes in step 4447, in step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process in step 4500 ( (When motor drive is executed)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4447, in step 4460 and step 4462, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311, turns off the retry operation execution standby flag, and sets the retry operation execution permission flag. It is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process {award ball payout control process in step 4500 (during motor drive)}. Even in the case of No in step 4445, the process proceeds to the next process {award ball payout control process in step 2400 (during motor drive)}.

  Here, in the case of No in step 4402 (that is, when the winning ball payout process is not being executed), in step 4470, whether or not the payout control means 3300 has received a game ball detection signal from the payout count sensor KE10s. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 4470, in step 4472, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to perform the next process {the prize ball payout control process (step 4500 ( (When motor drive is executed)}. Even in the case of No in step 4470, the process proceeds to the next process {award ball payout control process in step 4500 (during motor drive)}.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (during motor drive execution) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. Here, the process is a process of actually executing motor driving based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag that is turned on when a predetermined step counter number is set in the step counter temporary storage unit 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 43), and corresponds to the predetermined step counter number. This flag is turned off when all excitation is executed. Here, in the case of Yes in step 4505, in step 4510, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Next, at step 4520, the payout control means 3300 updates (increments by 1) the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excitation stator position specification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on a predetermined excitation method and switching speed. .

  Next, at step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation related to the motor operation (step-out phenomenon due to ball biting or the like) has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4530, in step 4550, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence or absence of a detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. In step 4555, the error control means 3200 determines whether the rotor is not rotating properly, that is, whether a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550. In the case of Yes in step 4555, in step 4560, the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and shifts to the next process (process at the time of motor error in step 4600). In the case of No in step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (motor error process in step 4600). In the case of No in step 4555, the error control means 3200 stores the error flag temporarily in step 4565. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (motor error process in step 4600).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the motor error process according to the subroutine of step 4600 in FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to forcibly shift the motor drive to a resting state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 of FIG. 45, it is detected whether or not the motor is present at the predetermined rotational position at a predetermined detection timing, and when the motor is not present at the predetermined rotational position, step out or the like is performed. This motor position abnormality flag is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 4605, in step 4610, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, in step 4615, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. In step 4620, the error control means 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 and proceeds to the next process (error detection error control process in step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time is no longer executed due to the occurrence of a motor error, and after the count value is cleared, the motor drive shifts to a pause state (step 4410 and step 44 in FIG. 44). 4415). Even in the case of No in step 4605, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100).

  Next, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 47 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting, such as when the game machine is powered on. That is, when the gaming machine is powered on, in step 5002, the sub main control unit SM performs initial processing (for example, if RAM clear information is received from the main side, When the RAM on the side is initialized and various information commands are received from the main side, the production-related information at the time of power interruption is set and restored). Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (e) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM.

  Here, when (e) is executed, as shown in the process of (e) of the figure, first, in step 5100, the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs the hold information management process described later. Execute. Next, in step 5400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 5500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 5600, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 5700, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes an error notification execution process described later. Next, in step 5020, the sub game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes a display command transmission control process (transmits commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side). The repetition processing routine is terminated.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (steps 5100 to 5700 and step 5020) is loop-processed after reset.

  Further, the process of FIG. 5F is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is sent to one terminal (in this example) of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM. , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (f). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the signal state from the STB signal line is turned on), in step 5004, the sub main control unit SM receives the signal from the main control board M side. Check the command input port (data signal line input port mentioned above). In step 5006, the sub main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process is restored.

  Next, the process of (g) of the same figure is a flowchart of the process at the time of power interruption at the time of power interruption signal reception from the power supply unit E, the main control board M, etc., for example. That is, when the power interruption signal is received, in step 5014, the sub-main control unit SM stores the game related information stored in the RAM in the save area. Next, in step 5016, the sub-main control unit SM starts supplying standby power to the save area. Next, in step 5018, the sub-main control unit SM prohibits execution of interrupt processing and shifts to a power interruption waiting loop. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and an area in which reserve power is automatically supplied even after power interruption is provided in the RAM (or a RAM in which reserve power is automatically supplied is provided), and game related information is stored in the area. You may comprise so that it may memorize | store.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 5100 in FIG. First, in step 5102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and receives a new hold occurrence command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the hold information relating to (1) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5102, in step 5104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, Add “1” to the maximum number of second main games. Next, in step 5106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold information (particularly, a random value related to the main game symbol lottery) based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side. The information is temporarily stored in the hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to Step 5116.

  On the other hand, if No in step 5102, has the drawing hold information display control means SM22 received the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 5108? Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 5108, in step 5110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 5112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 deletes the hold information related to the symbol variation from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and shifts the remaining hold information. Next, in step 5114, the sub game control means (sub main control part) SM accesses the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 5116. . Next, in step 5116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first hold display portion SG12 and the second hold display portion SG13). The same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value in the figure hold information temporary storage means SM22b are turned on and the process proceeds to the next process (step 5400). In the case of No in step 5108, the process proceeds to step 5116.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 5400 in FIG. First, in step 5402, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 5402, in step 5404, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5406, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b (symbol information ( Referring to the stop symbol / variation mode relating to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol If it is a flat eye such as “7, 7, 7” or a lost symbol, it will be “1, 3, 5”, etc.} and a variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short In the case of fluctuation, non-reach, in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined, and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related) Distribution temporary storage unit SM24b, temporarily stored in the reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b).

  Next, in step 5408, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 5500). Transition. In the case of No in step 5402, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5500).

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 5500 in FIG. First, in step 5502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5502, in step 5504, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 5506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5508, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 5510. Note that if the result is No in step 5502, the process proceeds to step 5510.

  Next, in step 5510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5510, in step 5511, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 checks the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5512, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the decorative symbol change start timing based on the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5512, in step 5514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). , Step 5530 follows.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5512, in step 5516, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5516, in step 5518, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). The process proceeds to step 5530.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5516, in step 5520, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25), the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5520, in step 5522, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) set the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 5020). At step 5530, and the process proceeds to step 5530. Note that if the result is No in Step 5520, the process proceeds to Step 5530.

  Next, in step 5530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game from the main control board M side). It is determined whether or not information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed has been received). In the case of Yes in step 5530, in step 5532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (deterministic display command) (transmits it to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). To do). Next, in step 5534, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5536, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (step 5600 processing). To do. In addition, also when it is No in step 5510 or step 5530, it transfers to the next process (process of step 5600).

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. First, in step 5602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 5602, in step 5604, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 5604, in step 5606, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the big hit is not the initial hit (the big hit in the non-probability variation / non-time shortened gaming state). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 5606, the process proceeds to step 5610. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5606 (in the case of the first hit), in step 5608, the background effect display control means SM23 resets the value of the extended number of times counter SM23c2 (zero clear), and proceeds to step 5610.

  Next, in step 5610, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 (increment) to the value of the consecutive resort number counter SM23c2. Next, in step 5612 and step 5614, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the big hit on the effect display device SG. Start display is performed (display is appropriately performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 5616. Note that if the answer is No in Step 5602, the process proceeds to Step 5616.

  Next, at step 5616, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gameability and jackpots). It may be executed as needed based on the type). Next, in step 5618, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the consecutive resort number counter SM23c2, and determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In the case of Yes in step 5618, in step 5620, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the big hit being executed is the maximum round big hit (for example, 16R big hit, 7A -It is determined whether it is a big hit (7B symbol). In the case of Yes in step 5620, in step 5622, the background effect display control means SM23 determines the ending effect {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total number of balls earned at the time of consecutive games, and a plurality of types of identification). A command related to the display of special game or production during special game, which is displayed only when a condition of one or a plurality of combinations such as generation of all occurrences, is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step 5626. On the other hand, in the case of No in either step 5618 or step 5620, in step 5624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the big hit progress display, and proceeds to step 5626.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect displayed during the jackpot execution a special effect based on the number of consecutive hits of the jackpot (the initial hit is not counted), and the second main game start opening In the case where a big hit is caused by the holding caused by the entry of the electric accessory B11d during the longest opening, even if the big hit is the first hit, the second main game start opening electric combination is counted as the number of consecutive games. It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of a change related to the hold that occurs during the longest release of the object B11d. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of conditions as conditions for generating an ending effect, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit with a specific effect) , Etc.) may be considered to be satisfied.

  Next, in step 5626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 5426, in step 5428, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the type of the big win). Next, in step 5430, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5700). . In addition, also when it is No in step 5404 or step 5426, it transfers to the next process (process of step 5700).

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of an error notification execution process according to the subroutine of step 5700 in FIG. First, in step 5702, the error notification control unit SM30 refers to the main side information temporary storage unit SM11b and determines whether an error occurrence command is received from the main side. If Yes in step 5702, in step 5704, the error notification control unit SM30 determines an error notification mode and an error notification end condition based on the error type corresponding to the received error occurrence command, and executes error notification. Note that errors that may occur in the present embodiment and the control when an error occurs are illustrated in detail in FIGS. 73 and 74.

  Next, in step 5706, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not the error notification end condition determined in the above-described processing is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 5706, the error notification related to the error that satisfies the error notification termination condition is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5020). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 5702 or step 5706, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 5020).

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when information regarding the game progress status and error occurrence information is output externally (for example, output to the hall computer HC), signal output Since there are abundant variations of modes, it is possible to output appropriate information according to the characteristics of the gaming machine to the outside.

(Second Embodiment)
Note that in a gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is the second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Here, in 2nd Embodiment, it has the specific area | region C22 (and specific area entrance detection apparatus C22s) in which a game ball can enter in 2nd main game start opening B10. Further, the special game control means MP30 has a distribution game execution control means MP36 that controls the execution of the distribution game described later. Further, the probability variation end condition determining means MP51 has a probability variation number counter MP51c for counting the number of remaining variations until the probability variation gaming state is terminated.

  Next, FIG. 53 is a configuration image diagram of the main game table referred to in FIG. 21 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is that a special game executed at the time of a big hit (especially, an open mode of a big prize opening) has a short opening time, and it is not possible to expect winning balls. (Relatively, the opening time is relatively long, and the opening mode in which the winning ball can be expected is “long opening”). That is, in the big hit relating to the big hit symbol “4A”, a special game with 8R short opening is executed. Further, in the big hit related to the big hit symbol “4B”, a special game with 16R short opening is executed. Also, in the big hits related to the big hit symbols “5A” and “5B”, a special game with an 8R length opening is executed. In the big hits related to the big hit symbols “7A” and “7B”, a special game with a 16R length opening is executed. Although not specifically shown in the present example, only the round in which the distribution game described later is executed may be configured to open the grand prize opening in the short opening mode (opening mode of the big prize opening). Is intended to be configured so that a scheduled entry into the specific area C22 can be set).

  Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 21 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about Step 1472 (second) to Step 1478 (second), and the purpose is the probability that a predetermined number of symbol variations have stopped after the end of the special game. The configuration is such that the variable gaming state can be terminated. That is, in step 1472 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1472 (second), in step 1474 (second), the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the value of the probability variation counter MP51c by one. Next, at step 1476 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1476 (second), in step 1478 (second), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. The processing proceeds to the processing after 1454 (processing relating to the end determination of the time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1472 (second) or step 1476 (second), the process proceeds to step 1454.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 8 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1510 (second), and the purpose is to calculate the value of the counter that counts the remaining number of fluctuations until the probability fluctuation gaming state ends when the big hit is reached. It is to reset. That is, in step 1410 (second), the special game control means MP30 clears the value of the probability variation counter MP51c (zero clear), and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 8 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is about step 1612 (second) and step 1650 (second), the purpose of which depends on whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game. This is to execute a distribution game execution process to be described later. That is, in step 1612 (second), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (particularly, the round number counter), and the round (second round) in which the round executes the distribution game. Or the fourth round). In the case of Yes in step 1612 (second), in step 1650 (second), the allocated game execution control means MP36 executes an allocated game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1638. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1612 (second), the process proceeds to step 1614, and the processing during the special game described in the present embodiment is executed.

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1650 (second) in FIG. 57 in the second embodiment. First, at step 1652, the allocated game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the allocated game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1652, the process proceeds to step 1666.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652, in step 1654, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the jackpot symbol related to the special game being executed becomes the long open jackpot. It is determined whether it is a symbol (for example, 5A, 7A, or 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in Step 1654, in Step 1655, the distribution game execution control means MP36 uses the long open pattern (for example, 15 seconds open) as the open pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. Then, an opening pattern designed to facilitate entry into the specific area C22 is set, and the process proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1614, that is, if the jackpot symbol related to the special game is a symbol (for example, 4A, 4B) that becomes a short open jackpot, in step 1656, the sorting game execution control means MP36 is specified. As the opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the region C22, a short opening pattern (for example, it was opened for 0.1 second and designed to make it difficult to enter the specific region C22) Set the release pattern) and go to step 1658.

  Next, at step 1658, the allocation game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, at step 1660, the distributed game execution control means MP36 turns on the distributed game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1662, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second big prize opening C20 with the set release pattern, and starts the release timer MP34t2. Next, at step 1664, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the second big prize opening valid period flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1666.

  Next, at step 1666, the distributed game execution control means MP36 sets a game state information command (command to the sub side) related to the special game. Next, at step 1668, the sorting game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the waiting-on-pay flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1668, in Step 1670, the allocated game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won the second big winning opening C20. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1670, the process proceeds to step 1672. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1670, in step 1671, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (the set opening pattern) of the second big prize opening C20 has ended. If YES in step 1671, the process proceeds to step 1672.

  Next, at step 1672, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1684, the distribution game execution control means MP36 starts by setting the big winning opening entrance waiting time (3 seconds in this example) to the big winning entrance entering standby timer MP34t3. Next, at step 1676, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the waiting-in-game flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1678. Note that if the result is No in step 1668, the process proceeds to step 1678.

  Next, in step 1678, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the big winning opening entrance waiting timer MP34t3, and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1678, in step 1680 and step 1682, the allocated game execution control means MP36 is in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the waiting-in-game flag and the second big prize opening are valid. Turn off the flag during the period. Next, at step 1684, the distribution game execution control means MP36 resets the value of the release timer MP34t2 (zero clear) and stops it. Next, at step 1686, the allocated game execution control means MP36 turns off the allocated game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b.

  Next, at step 1688, the assigned game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the assigned game execution round. In the case of Yes in step 1688, in step 1690, the allocated game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the jackpot symbol related to the special game being executed becomes a short open jackpot ( For example, it is determined whether or not 4A, 4B). In the case of Yes in step 1690, in other words, in the case where the entry into the specific area C22 is detected during the special game that should be difficult (not scheduled) to enter the specific area C22, the step In 1692, the distribution game execution control means MP36 is a specific area C22 illegal entry ball command {a command to the sub-side, not particularly shown, but if the command is received on the sub-side, a notification regarding illegal entry ( For example, “execute“ Illegal pitch detected ”” is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1694. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1690 (when the entry into the specific area C22 is normal), the process proceeds to step 1694. Next, at step 1694, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, Control goes to step 1696. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1688, the process proceeds to step 1696. Next, at step 1696, the allocated game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the allocated game execution round), and proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1638). In the case of No in step 1671 or step 1678, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1638).

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 56 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is that a transition to the probability-variable game state is made after the special game ends depending on whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area C22 during the special game (particularly during the distribution game). Determining whether or not, and changing the upper limit number of times of change of the main game symbol after the end of the special game in which the probability variation game state continues. That is, in step 1720 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the probability change transfer reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1720 (second), in step 1722 (second), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1724 (second) and step 1726 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 150) in the probability variation number counter MP51c and the hourly number of times counter MP52c. Processing of 1710 (processing for turning on the main game probability change flag, the main game short time flag, and the auxiliary game short time flag) is executed. On the other hand, if No in step 1720 (second), a predetermined number of times (for example, 100, which is a smaller value than in the case of entering the probability variation gaming state, for example, 100) is set in the time reduction number counter MP52c in step 1706. And the processing of Step 1710 (processing for turning on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag) is executed.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 8 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is about step 3504-2 (second), and its purpose is a table to be referred to so that a signal matching the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment can be output. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the gaming machine in step 3502, in step 3504-2 (second), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 2 and confirms the confirmed game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 1990 process).

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, it is a signal of the symbol variation system; for a part of symbol variation (for example, symbol variation on the first main game side) that triggers the opening of the big prize opening (attacker), the number of symbol variation is output. The signal is; when the change display of the first main game symbol is completed (for example, when the changing flag is turned on in step 1424 in the first main game symbol display process). When the period during which the symbol is fixedly displayed after completion (or when it is started, it may be during the period) may be output timing}; a signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.5 seconds is there. The output period is preferably configured to be shorter than the shortest period that the variable display period of the first main game symbol can take.

  Next, it is a signal of a big hit system; a big winning opening (an attacker, for example, a second winning gate provided with a ball entering area (in this example, a specific area C22) for determining whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state The big winning opening C20) is being opened shortly (for example, the maximum opening time is 0.01 seconds) and the round is being executed (the special electric accessory is operating), and the entry detection to the entry area is detected. When it is in a valid state, a signal that outputs that the game ball has entered the entry area is; a round in which the second big prize opening is opened shortly, and to a specific area When the game ball enters a specific area when the ball detection is valid (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1690); a signal that outputs an ON signal for 1 second It is. It should be noted that it is preferable not to output in the case of one special game other than the first one satisfying the output timing.

  Next, it is a security signal; that a gaming machine is powered on, and an illegal act that can be detected by the gaming machine {e.g., abnormal prize winning ... different from a big prize opening that performs opening control. Entering the grand prize award. Magnet sensor error: The sensor that detects the approach of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism. Radio wave sensor error: A sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves. Vibration sensor error: Abnormal vibration is detected by the sensor that senses vibration, except during the execution of each round under a predetermined condition = big hit. Switch anomaly error ... While a ball is detected by a switch for detecting a ball entering each winning opening, the ball is not detected by a ball check switch downstream of the switch. Abnormal discharge error of the big prize opening ... Compared with the number of balls detected by the switch for detecting the entry to the big prize opening, it is detected by the discharge confirmation switch downstream of the switch. There are more entrances. Inconsistent error of the winning prize entry / exit ball ... Detected by the discharge confirmation switch downstream of the switch compared to the number of entries detected by the switch for detecting the entry to the big prize opening. The signal that outputs that the number of entered balls is smaller, etc. is performed; 1. Arbitrary timing after power-on {eg, (a) start of execution of main process on main control board side in FIG. 8} {after elapse of a predetermined period (one interrupt = 0.004 seconds) after power-on} and At the time of detection of the cheating {* may be after the elapse of a predetermined period (one interrupt = 0.004 seconds) from the time of detection}; in the case of 1, over the first period (30 seconds) An ON signal is output. In the case of 2, the ON signal is output over the second period (18 seconds). If the output period overlaps, the output period of one signal output this time is discarded, and the next output is newly started {* The next output timing is satisfied In this case, after the elapse of a predetermined period (one interrupt = 0.004 seconds), the output period of one signal output this time may be discarded and the next output may be newly started. }. Moreover, even if the output signals are the same, it is preferable that the output periods are different between the case 1 and the case 2.

  Next, it is a signal of a winning detection system; a part of the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10) related to the symbol variation that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker), and each starting opening The signal to output the number of times of entering the ball is; when one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the ball entering the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start flag is turned off in step 2206) → When turned on): After outputting an ON signal for 0.1 seconds, this signal outputs an OFF signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

  Next, it is a signal of the winning detection system; a part of the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) related to the symbol variation that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker), and each starting opening A signal for outputting the number of times of entering the ball is; when a single ball is detected by a switch for detecting a ball entering the second main game starting port (which is equipped with an electric accessory) (for example, In the case where the second main game start flag is turned off to on in step 2226): After the on signal is outputted for 0.1 seconds, the off signal is outputted for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. In addition, when an illegal entry to the second main game start opening (the one in which the electric accessory is mounted) is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied by using the entry.

  Next, it is a signal of a winning detection system; an ordinary electric accessory (electric Chu, for example, a second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), a start port (for example, an auxiliary) related to symbol variation that is an opportunity to open The signal that outputs the number of times of entering each start opening is targeted for all of the game starting openings H10); a single entry is detected by a switch for detecting entry to the auxiliary gaming start opening (passing gate) (For example, when the auxiliary game start flag is turned off to on in step 2106); after the on signal is output for 0.1 seconds, the off signal is output for 0.1 seconds. . If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

  By configuring as described above, the game ball enters the specific area C22 in a predetermined round (in this example, the second and fourth rounds) during the special game according to the second embodiment. Even in a gaming machine configured to be determined to shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of a special game, information regarding the game progress status and error occurrence information is externally output (for example, output to the hall computer HC). At this time, it is possible to externally output appropriate information that matches the characteristics of the gaming machine.

(Third embodiment)
Note that in a gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment and the second embodiment, information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Here, in the third embodiment, the auxiliary game start port H10 and the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s also have functions as a specific entrance and a specific entrance entrance detection device described later. (In the description according to the third embodiment, it may be referred to as a specific entrance H10 and a specific entrance entrance detection device H11s).

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 8 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1605 (third) and step 1607 (third), and the purpose is to enter the game ball into the specific entrance H10 after the stop display of the jackpot symbol. It is configured not to start a special game until a ball is detected. That is, in the case of Yes in step 1604 (after the big hit symbol stop and before the opening of the big winning opening relating to the special game), in step 1605 (third), the special game control means MP30 performs the specific game. It is determined whether or not a ball entering the mouth H10 is detected. In the case of Yes in step 1605 (third), the process proceeds to step 1606, and normal processing relating to execution of the special game is executed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1605 (third), in step 1607 (third), the special game control means MP30 sets a specific entry entrance entry operation display start instruction command (command to the sub side) (described later). Thus, on the sub side, an image prompting entry into the specific entrance is displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1900). In addition, in this example, it is configured to transmit the specific entrance entrance entry operation display start instruction command to the sub side until the entrance to the specific entrance H10 is made. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a command for starting display on the sub side is transmitted only once after the stoppage display of the big hit symbol, or after entering the specific entrance H10 after the stop display of the big hit symbol. After waiting for a preparation period until the start of the special game becomes valid, a command for starting display on the sub-side may be transmitted. By configuring in this way, an image prompting entry into the specific entrance H10 is displayed until stoppage of the specific entrance H10 is detected after stop display of the big hit symbol.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. 47 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about Step 5640 (third) and Step 5642 (third), and the purpose is to enter a specific entrance H10 in accordance with a command from the main side. Is to display an image prompting the user. That is, in the case of Yes in step 5602 (before the special game is executed), in step 5640 (third), the effect display control means SM20 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the specific entry from the main side. It is determined whether or not an entrance ball operation display start instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5640 (third), in step 5642 (third), the effect display control means SM20 displays an image that prompts the game ball to enter the specific entrance H10 (for example, “specific input”). A command to display “special game starts when entering the ball opening” is set, and the process proceeds to step 5604. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5640 (third), the process proceeds to step 5604.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 8 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-3 (third), and the purpose thereof is a table to be referenced so that a signal matching the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment can be output. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the gaming machine in step 3502, in step 3504-3 (third), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 3 and confirms the confirmed game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1990).

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it. Further, although not particularly shown in this example, a small hit (only one unit game is executed to open the big prize opening until a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined period of time elapses) is satisfied ( (A case where a unit game is executed a plurality of times is called a big hit) may be executed, and in the figure, it is described as being configured to be able to execute a small hit.

  First of all, it is a signal of a big hit system; satisfying the conditions that can open the big prize opening (attacker) (the combination of symbols that would activate the condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device was displayed), And, the signal that outputs that the winning prize opening (attacker) is in a period that can be opened (during operation of the accessory continuous operation device) is finished; After the device operation flag is changed from OFF to ON, when a signal is output in the next interrupt process for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the interrupt process cycle is added. 504 seconds) {* Note that the output timing may be when the period in which the symbols are fixedly displayed after the end of the variable display ends (or when it starts, or during the period)} During the period the post the output timing, and, in the special game is running period (e.g., during conditions device operation flag is ON) is a signal output of the always-on signal. In addition, since the special game is not executed unless the game ball enters the specific entrance (for example, the specific entrance H10) after the symbol variation display related to the jackpot symbol is finished, the above-described output period May vary.

  Next, it is a signal of the big hit system; the first condition that can open the big winning opening (attacker) is satisfied (the combination of symbols that will activate the condition device related to the accessory continuous action device is displayed) And a second condition that can open the special winning opening (attacker) in addition to outputting that the special winning opening (attacker) is open (during operation of the continuous action device). That it is satisfied (the combination of symbols that the special electric accessory will be activated is displayed) and that it is during the period during which the special winning opening (attacker) can be opened (the special electric accessory is operating) The signal to be output is: after the symbol fluctuation display related to the jackpot symbol is completed (for example, the condition device operation flag is turned off to on in step 1432), the next time (for example, 0.5 seconds, the next time Split In the case of outputting a signal only in the case of processing, when 0.504 seconds (in which the period of interrupt processing is added) has elapsed, and the symbol fluctuation display relating to the small hit symbol has ended {for example, the second described later The configuration according to the fourth embodiment will be described as an example. After the small hit flag is turned on from step 1436 (fourth), the next interrupt processing is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). When a signal is output at, if the period of interrupt processing is added, 0.504 seconds) has passed {* In addition, after the variable display ends, the period during which the symbols are fixedly displayed ends (Or when started, during the period) may be the output timing}; during the period after the output timing, and special games (things related to jackpots, those related to jackpots) are being executed During the period (for example, During the period in which the condition device operation flag is on, and in the case of the configuration in the fourth embodiment to be described later as an example, the small hit flag and / or the small hit execution flag is on) ON signal output {* In the case of special games related to small hits, start demo time and end demo time may be included, and further output depending on the game state before the start of special games related to small hits It is preferable to add a period (1.0 seconds for the time-reduced gaming state and 10.0 seconds for the non-time-reduced gaming state). In this case, the output from the closing of the big prize opening While the maximum difference in duration is 9.0 seconds, in special games related to big wins, the output period from closing of the big prize opening is constant, or the additional period of the output period in special games related to small wins Only a shorter period than the difference will occur You may comprise. In addition, the small hit end demonstration time in the time reduction gaming state is configured to be shorter (shortest) than the time that can be taken as the big hit end demonstration time in the time reduction gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state. Therefore, in the opening of the big prize opening that is difficult to obtain the ball (small hit), it is possible to configure the player not to recognize the occurrence of the small hit itself (in that case, the output period of the signal is The signal is a period based on the big hit end demo time or the small hit end demo time). In addition, since the special game is not executed unless the game ball enters the specific entrance (for example, the specific entrance H10) after the symbol variation display related to the jackpot symbol is finished, the above-described output period May vary.

  Next, it is a signal of the big hit system; the condition that can open the big winning opening (attacker) was satisfied (the combination of symbols that would activate the condition device related to the accessory continuous action device was displayed) , During the period when the winning prize opening (attacker) can be opened (during the operation of the continuous action device), and during the game to shorten the time of symbol variation that triggers the opening of the winning prize opening (attacker) (change time) The signal that indicates that the shortening function is in operation) is: a predetermined period (for example, after the condition device operation flag is turned on in step 1432) after the symbol fluctuation display related to the jackpot symbol is finished (for example, Although it is 0.5 seconds, when a signal is output in the next interruption process, the period of the interruption process is added (0.504 seconds), and the time-reduced game is started. (For example, when the main game short time flag is turned off → on at step 1708 and / or when the auxiliary game short time flag is turned off → on at step 1710); during a period after the output timing (for example, , After a predetermined time has elapsed since the conditional device operation flag was turned off in step 1432 until the conditional device operation flag was turned on → off), during a period in which the special game is being executed ( For example, during the period in which the accessory continuous operation device operation flag and / or the condition device operation flag is on, and during the time reduction game is being executed (for example, the main game short time flag and / or the auxiliary game short time flag) Is a signal that always outputs an on signal. In addition, since the special game is not executed if there is no game ball entering the specific entrance (specific entrance H10) after the symbol variation display related to the jackpot symbol is finished, the output period is variable. There is a case.

  Next, it is a security signal; that a RAM initialization operation has been performed in the gaming machine, and a fraud that can be detected in the gaming machine {for example, a magnet sensor error... Sensor detects abnormal magnetism. Grand prize opening abnormal error ... Compared to the number of entrances that can be entered by design within the longest open period of the grand prize opening (or the total period when multiple rounds are executed), The number of entered balls detected by the switch for detecting the entrance to the grand prize opening is larger. Start opening prize abnormality error 1 ... Detected by a fraud prevention switch downstream of the switch compared to the number of balls detected by a switch for detecting the entrance to a certain start opening The number of balls entered is smaller. Start opening prize abnormality error 2 ... Compared to the number of balls that can be entered by design within the longest open period (including the interval after closing) of ordinary electric instruments, During the period when the number of entrances detected by the switch for detecting is larger or the ordinary electric accessory cannot be opened, the entrance of the ordinary electric accessory is detected by the switch. Detected, etc.} is a signal that outputs that: 1. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation (for example, RAM clear is executed in step 1004); When detecting the fraudulent behavior; in the case of 1, the on signal is output over the first period (30 seconds), and in the case of 2, the on signal is output over the second period (30 seconds). This is a signal to be output. If the output periods overlap, the output period of one signal output this time is discarded, and the next output is newly started. Further, the output period may be different between the case 1 and the case 2.

  With the configuration as described above, after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed according to the third embodiment, the execution of the special game (opening of the big prize opening) is waited until the game ball enters the specific entrance H10. Even in a gaming machine configured to be able to output information appropriate to the characteristics of the gaming machine when the information regarding the game progress status and error occurrence information is output externally (for example, output to the hall computer HC) Will be able to. Although not particularly illustrated in the present example, it may be configured such that a game ball can easily enter the specific entrance H10 (auxiliary game start port H10) and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, Moreover, you may comprise so that the number of prize balls concerning the entrance to 2nd main game start opening B10 may become smaller than the number of prize balls concerning the entrance to 1st main game start opening A10.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment, information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is the fourth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Here, in 4th Embodiment, the game progress means MP has the small hit game control means MP40 which manages the process which concerns on a small hit game.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart of main control side main processing and timer interruption processing in the fourth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1800 (fourth), and the purpose is to configure so that a small hit game control process described later can be executed. That is, in step 1800 (fourth), the small hit game control means MP40 executes a small hit game control process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and 1400 (2) in FIG. 20 in the fourth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1434 (fourth) and step 1436 (fourth), and the purpose is small if the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. It is to turn on a flag (small hit flag) that triggers the execution of a hit game. That is, in the case of No in step 1430 (when the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol), in step 1434 (fourth), the game progress means MP refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Then, it is determined whether or not the main game symbol that is stopped is a small hit symbol.

  Here, FIG. 67 is an image diagram of the main game table referred to when determining the main game content. As shown in the figure, the fourth embodiment is configured to win a small hit (the symbol relating to the small hit is “K”). The jackpot related to the jackpot symbol “3A” is configured such that the opening mode of the jackpot is short.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 1434 (fourth), in step 1436 (fourth), the game progress means MP is a small hit flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Is turned on, and the flow shifts to Step 1450. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1434 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1450.

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 65 in the fourth embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is about step 1605-1 (fourth), step 1605-2 (fourth), and step 1617 (fourth), and the purpose is a big hit in the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of a special game according to the above, it is configured to shift to a time-saving game state after the special game ends, and a long opening and a short opening are set as an opening mode of the special winning opening (especially, in the short opening, it will be described later) The opening pattern is set to be similar to the opening pattern of the big winning opening by the small hit. That is, if Yes in step 1604 (during execution of the process immediately after the big hit symbol stop), in step 1605-1 (fourth), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, It is determined whether or not the special game is a special game related to a jackpot in the time-saving game state. In the case of Yes in step 1605-1 (fourth), in step 1605-2 (fourth), the special game control means MP30 sets the short-time transfer reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Turn on, proceed to step 1606, and execute a special game start process. Note that if the result in step 1605-1 (fourth) is No, the process proceeds to step 1606.

  In addition, in the case of Yes in step 1614 (when it is the start timing of a certain round during the special game), in step 1617 (fourth), the special game control means MP30 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the round { For example, in the case of a long open big hit, an open pattern that is 30 seconds open → closed, and in the case of a short open big hit, an open pattern that is 0.2 second open → closed (including the waiting time for entering the ball) Then, it takes 13.0 seconds to open the 5R bonus winning opening relating to the special game)}, and the process proceeds to Step 1618.

  Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1700 in FIG. 68 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1740, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the big hit symbol related to the special game is a probable big hit symbol (for example, 3A, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1740, in step 1742, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b.

  Next, in step 1744, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol that triggered the special game is a jackpot symbol without time (for example, jackpot symbol “3A”). In the case of Yes in step 1744, in step 1746, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the time shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1746, the process proceeds to step 1748. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1746, that is, in the case where the special game is a special game related to the timeless big hit symbol (for example, “3A”) in the non-time-saving game state, the transition to the time-saving game is not made. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1744 {if the special game is not a jackpot related to the short hit big hit symbol (for example, “3A”)}, the procedure also goes to step 1748.

  Next, at step 1748, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the short-time transfer reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1750 and step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next processing (step 1800).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1740 (when the special game is a special game related to a non-probable big hit symbol), in step 1754, the specific game control means MP50 determines the predetermined number of times (time reduction) as the value of the time-count counter MP52c. The upper limit number of times that the gaming state continues, for example, 50) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1748. By configuring in this way, after the special game related to the jackpot symbol “3A” in the non-time-reduced gaming state (special game that cannot be expected to win a game), the probability variation / non-time-reduced gaming state is reached. It will be a transition.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1800 in FIG. 65 in the fourth embodiment. First, at step 1652, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the game state temporary storage means MB and determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the gaming state temporary storage means MB. Next, in step 1806, the small hit game control means MP40 is preferably an open pattern related to the round (the small hit game) {open pattern similar to the open pattern of the big winning opening at the time of short open big hit, , “Opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 3 seconds” is repeated 5 times (for the last repetition, it is a closing until the next opening), etc.} is set. Next, in step 1808, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) and starts the opening timer MP34t2. Next, in step 1814, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the flag during the first (second) big prize opening valid period in the flag area of the pitch related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Transition.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1802, in step 1816, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the pitch related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. . If YES in step 1816, the process proceeds to step 1818.

  Next, in step 1818, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the small hit entry waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1818, in Step 1820, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) is added to the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20). ). If Yes in step 1820, the process proceeds to step 1824. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1820, in step 1822, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the release timer MP34t2 for a predetermined time related to opening the big prize opening {for example, “0.2 second release → 3 second release”. It is determined whether or not 13.0 seconds}, which is the time required to execute the opening pattern, is repeated 5 times (the closing is the closing until the next opening at the end of the repetition). If Yes in step 1822, the process proceeds to step 1824.

  Next, in step 1824, the small hit game control means MP40 stops driving the first big prize opening electric combination C11d or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d and the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C10d. The winning opening C20 is closed. Next, at step 1826, the small hit game control means MP40 sets and starts the big winning opening entrance waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) in the big winning entrance entering waiting timer MP34t3. Next, in step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1830. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1818, the process proceeds to step 1830.

  Next, at step 1830, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the big winning opening entrance waiting timer MP34t3, and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1830, in step 1832, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hitting ball waiting waiting flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1834, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the flag during the first (second) big prize opening valid period in the flag area of the pitch related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, at step 1836, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the release timer MP34t2. Next, in step 1838, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next processing (step 1900 processing). . In addition, also when it is No at step 1816 or step 1822, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1900).

  By configuring in this way, the big winning opening is a short opening opening mode {for example, when the short opening is a big hit, an opening pattern of 0.2 second opening → closing (when 5R is executed, the ball is entered) Including the waiting time, repeat the "opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 3 seconds" 5 times (the end of the repetition is closing until the next opening)} Open mode similar to short-open big hit {for example, “0.2 second open → 3 second close” is repeated 5 times (the open pattern is closed until the next open at the end of repetition)} Since it is possible to execute a small hit to open the winning opening, it is difficult to determine the current gaming state, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. With small hits, the sub-side It is preferable that effect to be executed is configured to be identical (or substantially identical).

  Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 65 in the fourth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-4 (fourth), and the purpose thereof is a table to be referenced so that a signal matching the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment can be output. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the gaming machine in step 3502, in step 3504-4 (fourth), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 4 and confirms the confirmed game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1990).

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First of all, it is a signal of a big hit system; a big winning opening (attacker) on the condition that a game that shortens the time of symbol change (actuation of the changing time reducing function) is scheduled to open the big winning opening (attacker) The game is in a period during which it is possible to open the game (while the accessory continuous operation device is in operation), and the game is in a time-saving game that will trigger the opening of the big prize opening (attacker) (while the variable time reduction function is in operation). Is a signal that is output when the special game is started under the condition that the transition to the time-saving game is scheduled (for example, when the short-time transition reservation flag is switched from OFF to ON, or other than the jackpot symbol “3A”) If the condition device operation flag and / or the combination device operation flag in the special game related to the big hit symbol is turned off to on), and when the time reduction game is started (for example, step 175) In the case where the main game short flag is turned off to on and / or the auxiliary game short time flag is turned off to on in step 1752); special under the condition that the transition to the time-reduced game is scheduled During the period in which the game is being executed (for example, during the period in which the short-time transition reservation flag is on, or in the special game related to the big hit symbol other than the big hit symbol “3A”, the condition device operation flag and / or the combination device operation flag is During a period in which the time reduction game is being executed (for example, during a period in which the main game short flag and / or the auxiliary game short flag is on), a signal that always outputs an on signal. is there. Note that, when a small hit occurs, the signal is output based on information related to the time-saving game (for example, on / off of the main game short flag and / or the auxiliary game short flag), while the big hit is In the case of occurrence, not only information related to time-saving games (for example, on / off of the main game short time flag and / or auxiliary game short time flag), but also information related to special games (for example, short time transition reservation flag, condition device) It is supplemented that it is output based on the operation flag and / or the linkage device operation flag.

  Next, it is a signal of a big hit system; it outputs that it is during a period in which the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened over a plurality of rounds (in the operation of the accessory continuous actuator), in addition, the big winning prize During a period when the winning mouth (attacker) can be opened only in one round, provided that it is not in a game that shortens the time of symbol change that triggers the opening of the mouth (attacker) (while the variable time reduction function is in operation) The signal that outputs that (the special electric accessory is in operation) is; when a special game related to the jackpot symbol is started (for example, when the accessory continuous action device operation flag is turned off in step 1606, Alternatively, if the condition device operation flag is turned off in step 1432 and a special game related to the small hit design is started under the condition of non-time-reduced game (for example, the main game short time) In the situation where the lag and / or auxiliary game short time flag is off, when the small hit flag or small hit execution flag is turned off to on), after the output timing, special games (related to big hit, small hit related Is during execution (for example, during the period when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag and / or the condition device operation flag is ON, and during the period when the small hit flag and / or the small hit execution flag is ON. (Middle) is a signal that always outputs an ON signal {* in the case of a special game related to small hits, the start demo time and the end demo time may be included}.

  Next, it is a signal of a big hit system; when it is in the time reduction game of the symbol variation that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker) (in the time of the variable time reduction function is activated), in the above-mentioned time reduction game In addition, the conditions for opening the special winning opening (attacker) are satisfied (the combination of symbols that will activate the conditional device related to the accessory continuous operating device is displayed). (Attacker) is in a period that can be released (during the operation of the continuous action device), and when it is not in the time-reduced game described above, a combination of predetermined symbols (those that will not be able to get a lot of balls) Satisfy the conditions that can open the grand prize opening (attacker) by other than (displays a combination of symbols that will activate the condition device related to the continuous action device is displayed) multiple rounds Thus, a signal that outputs that the period in which the winning prize opening (attacker) can be opened (during the continuous operation of the accessory) is activated; when a time-reduced game is started (for example, in the step 1750, the main game short time flag) When the game is turned off → on and / or when the auxiliary game short time flag is turned off → on at step 1752), when the special game related to the big hit symbol is started under the condition of time saving game (for example, , When the time shift reservation flag is turned off to on), and when a special game other than the predetermined big hit symbol is started under the condition of non-time-reduced game (for example, the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time) When the flag is off and the jackpot symbol other than the jackpot symbol “3A” is stopped, the accessory continuous actuating device activation flag and / or the condition device activation flag are turned off → A special game is being executed during the period in which the time-reduced game is being executed (for example, the period in which the main game short flag and / or the auxiliary game short flag is on) and after the output timing. During the period (for example, during the period when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag and / or the condition device operation flag is on), the signal is always output as an on signal.

  Next, it is a security signal; RAM initialization operation or error canceling operation in gaming machines (the event of insufficient payout occurs a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period in spite of the award ball payout operation being performed) The operation to cancel the error in the event that the game has been performed) and fraud that can be detected by the gaming machine (for example, during the period during which the illegal prize 1... During a period other than the time when the accessory was activated, a ball entering the big prize opening (attacker) was detected. Unauthorized winning 2 ... During the period when the ordinary electric accessory cannot be opened (except for a predetermined period immediately after closing), the entry to the ordinary electric accessory was detected by the switch. Magnet sensor error: The sensor that detects the approach of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism (detected for 0.1 second or more). Radio wave sensor error: A sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves (detected over 0.01 seconds). Winning mouth switch error: This switch is used to detect the entrance to each winning entrance, and has been detected for more than a predetermined period (0.2 seconds or more). The signal that outputs: 1. Arbitrary timing after a RAM initialization operation (for example, RAM clear is executed in step 1004) or an error release operation is performed; 2. when detecting the fraudulent act (illegal prize 1, fraud prize 2); Upon detection of the fraud (magnet sensor error, radio wave sensor error, prize opening switch error); in case 1 above, an ON signal is output over the first period (30 seconds); , An ON signal is output over the second period (30 seconds), and in the case of 3, the third period (30 seconds after each fraud is being detected and after each fraud is not detected) This is a signal that outputs an ON signal. If the output periods overlap, the output period of one signal output this time is discarded, and the next output is newly started. Further, the output period may be different between the case 1 and the case 2.

  Next, there are security-related signals; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, and the illegal act that can be detected by the gaming machine {for example, a prize winning prize illegal prize error ... During a period other than the period during which (Attacker) can be released (when the special electric accessory is activated), more than a predetermined number (5) of balls entered the Grand Prize Winner (Attacker) were detected, but one round Only during the period when the special winning opening (attacker) can be opened (when the special electric accessory is in operation) is excluded. Predetermined start opening illegal prize error: A ball entering the ordinary electric accessory was detected during a period when the ordinary electric accessory cannot be opened. Magnet sensor error: The sensor that detects the approach of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism. Inductive magnetic field detection error: A sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves, etc.}. 1. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation (for example, RAM clear is executed in step 1004); At the time of detecting the fraud, after outputting an ON signal for 0.05 seconds, it is a signal for outputting an OFF signal for 0.05 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, the output period may be the same as the output period in the IN / OUT system, the symbol fluctuation system, or the winning detection system.

  By configuring as described above, according to the fourth embodiment, the big winning opening is an open mode with a short opening (for example, when the short opening is a big hit, an opening pattern (open / closed for 0.2 seconds) When executing for 5R, including the waiting time for entering the ball, “Open for 0.2 seconds → Close for 3 seconds” is repeated 5 times (the last repeat will be closed until the next release)}. Short opening big hit and opening manner similar to the short opening big hit {for example, “0.2 second opening → 3 second closing” is repeated five times. In the gaming machine configured to make it difficult to determine the current gaming state and improve the fun of the game by being able to execute a small hit to open the big prize opening in the opening pattern} Regarding status and error occurrence information Information external output (e.g., output to the hall computer HC) upon which, so that the appropriate information according to the characteristics of the gaming machine can be externally output.

(Error control)
Next, FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 are tables summarizing the processing when an error occurs in the gaming machine according to this example. The processing when an error occurs will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, FIG. 73 will be described. As an error related to game ball discharge; payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refer to its own counter (excess payout counter, for example, excessive payout cumulative counter 3241); When the number is reached (the cumulative number of excessive payouts exceeds the allowable number) (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 4124); the payout operation is stopped, and the error indicator (error to the 7-segment indicator) The display of the number (1) is executed, and when the power supply is turned off, the payout operation is canceled and the error number is not displayed. Is configured to preferentially display the ones with high priority for maintaining the stop of the payout operation and for the notification control, and displaying the error on the effect display device SG and blinking the frame decoration LED. In the error alarm sound reproduction may perform error notification.

  Next, as an error relating to the game ball payout; the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refer to the count sensor (for example, payout count sensor KE10s); an abnormal signal from the sensor is detected Case (for example, when the ball apparatus error flag is turned on from step 4195-2); the payout operation is stopped, and the error number (3) is displayed on the error display (7-segment display). To do. Further, when the power supply is turned off, the payout operation is resumed and the error display is not displayed. In addition, when it overlaps with the error which concerns on other game ball payout, it is comprised so that a thing with a high priority may be preferentially displayed about the stop of payout operation | movement and alerting | reporting control. The error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is merely an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

  Next, as an error related to the game ball payout; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refer to the count sensor (for example, the payout count sensor KE10s); (For example, when the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is turned off → on in step 2372, or when the payout motor operation error flag is turned off → on in step 4115); payout operation Stop and display the error number (5) on the error display (7-segment display). Further, by operating the error cancel switch (for example, pressing the error cancel switch KH3a); resuming the payout operation and not displaying the error display. In addition, when it overlaps with the error which concerns on other game ball payout, it is comprised so that a thing with a high priority may be preferentially displayed about the stop of payout operation | movement and alerting | reporting control. The error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is merely an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

  Next, as an error relating to game ball payout; the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refer to the count sensor (for example, payout count sensor KE10s); In the case where a ball-in signal exceeding the predetermined number is detected from the sensor (for example, when the game ball detection flag when the payout operation is not completed is turned off → on in step 4432); the payout operation is stopped, and an error is displayed. The error number (5) is displayed on the display (7-segment display). Further, by operating the error cancel switch (for example, pressing the error cancel switch KH3a); resuming the payout operation and not displaying the error display. In addition, when it overlaps with the error which concerns on other game ball payout, it is comprised so that a thing with a high priority may be preferentially displayed about the stop of payout operation | movement and alerting | reporting control. The error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is merely an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

  Next, as an error relating to game ball payout; the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refer to the payout motor sensor (for example, rotor position confirmation sensor KE10 ms); payout motor for one game ball When driving is completed, if the sprocket (for example, sprocket KE10p) is not rotationally displaced by a predetermined angle (for example, if the motor position abnormality flag is turned off to on in step 4560, or paid out in step 4173) When the motor error flag is changed from OFF to ON): The payout operation is stopped (or the retry operation is executed), and the error number (7) is displayed on the error display (7-segment display). Also, due to the operation of the error release switch (for example, pressing of the error release switch KH3a) or the passage of a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) after the occurrence of the error (for example, determined to be Yes in step 4191-3); The payout operation is resumed and the error display is not displayed. In addition, when it overlaps with the error which concerns on other game ball payout, it is comprised so that a thing with a high priority may be preferentially displayed about the stop of payout operation | movement and alerting | reporting control. The error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is merely an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

  Next, as an error relating to game ball payout; payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refer to count sensor (for example, payout count sensor KE10s); when execution of payout control for a predetermined number is completed (Or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after completion) when a ball-in signal less than the predetermined number is detected from the sensor (for example, when the switch non-passing error detection flag is turned off in step 4446); The operation is stopped (or the low-speed payout operation is executed), and the error number (7) is displayed on the error display (7-segment display). Also, due to the operation of the error release switch (for example, pressing of the error release switch KH3a) or the passage of a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) after the occurrence of the error (for example, determined to be Yes in step 4192-3); The payout operation is resumed and the error display is not displayed. In addition, when it overlaps with the error which concerns on other game ball payout, it is comprised so that a thing with a high priority may be preferentially displayed about the stop of payout operation | movement and alerting | reporting control. The error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is merely an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

  Next, as an error relating to an abnormal winning; the main control board (for example, the main control board M) is; a first (second) big winning opening sensor (for example, the first big winning opening C10 ball detecting device or the second large Reference is made to the winning opening C20 entering detection device); when a game ball entering the first (second) winning opening outside the first (second) winning opening valid period is detected (eg, step 2305) (* However, during execution of a special game, it may be a case where the ball is detected a predetermined number of times during execution of one special game); a frame decoration LED (for example, a frame decoration lamp) D18-L) is turned on, error display and error notification sound reproduction are performed on the effect display device SG. In addition, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the power is turned on again (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1002), or when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of the error; the error notification is terminated.

Next, as an error related to the door opening; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refer to the door opening sensor (for example, the door unit opening detection sensor D18s); the door opening sensor is turned on from off (For example, when the door open flag is turned off to on in step 1924); the payout operation is stopped, the ball lending is prohibited, and the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) flashes. In the effect display device SG, error display, error notification sound reproduction, and reproduction of a dedicated entry sound effect when entry to the first (second) main game start opening or auxiliary game start opening is detected, Run. Further, when the door opening sensor changes from on to off (for example, when the door opening flag is turned on to off in step 1928); the payout operation is resumed, the ball lending is permitted, and the error display, error The notification sound reproduction and the reproduction of the ball effect sound are finished (the frame decoration LED continues to blink until a predetermined time elapses after the error is released). In addition, when it overlaps with an error related to other special winning opening abnormality detection, suspension of the payout operation and prohibition of ball lending are maintained, and regarding the notification control, the special winning opening abnormality detection is prioritized. . Further, the detection subject may be the main control board, or when an error with a high priority (for example, a prize winning port abnormality detection) occurs, a measure relating to the error with a high priority may be preferentially executed. In addition, the time from the error release to the end of the error notification sound reproduction can be within the shortest fluctuation time of the main game symbol, while the time from the error release to the end of the blinking of the frame decoration LED is the shortest fluctuation time of the main game symbol Note that it is configured to exceed

  Next, as an error relating to the frame; the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refer to the frame open sensor (front frame unit open detection sensor D14s); the frame open sensor changes from OFF to ON (For example, when the frame open flag is turned off from on in step 1934); the payout operation is stopped, the ball lending is prohibited, and the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) blinks and produces an effect. Error display and error notification sound reproduction are executed on the display device SG. Further, when the opening detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from on to off (for example, when the frame opening flag is turned on to off in step 1938); the reproduction of the error display and error notification sound is terminated. (Even after the error is cleared, the frame decoration LED continues to blink until a predetermined time elapses). The detection subject may be a main control board.

  Next, as an error relating to the detection of the prize winning hole abnormality; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the first (second) big prize opening sensor (for example, the first big prize opening C10 ball detection device or Reference is made to the second grand prize opening C20 entry detection device); when a game ball has entered the first (second) big prize opening outside the first (second) big prize opening validity period ( For example, if it is determined No in step 2305); the entry relating to the error occurrence is invalidated, and the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) / board decoration LED (for example, the electric decoration lamp D26) The monitor LED (for example, the error lamp SS3) is turned on, the error display is performed on the effect display device SG, and the error notification sound is reproduced. Further, when the power is turned on again {for example, (a) start of execution of main processing on the main control board side in FIG. 8] or when the opening detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from on to off (for example, in step 1938, the frame When the open flag is changed from on to off); the error notification is terminated. Note that the frame decoration LED (and the board decoration LED) is not blinking but is lit. Further, although the error canceling condition for the frame opening is the same, the lighting condition for the frame decoration LED is different.

  Next, as errors relating to detection of a prize opening abnormality; main control board (for example, main control board M); radio wave sensor, all entrance entrance sensors (for example, first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s) , Second main game starting entrance ball detection device B11s, first grand prize opening C10 entrance detection device, second major entrance C20 entrance detection device, general winning entrance entrance detection device, out entrance entrance detection device C80s ), Referring to the first (second) big prize opening sensor; abnormal radio wave detection (for example, when the fraudulent radio wave detection flag is turned off to on in step 1912), or the prize sensor or the out switch is turned on for a certain period of time. (For example, when the long-time detection flag corresponding to each entrance is turned off to on in steps 2242, 2322, 2422, and 2622) When a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the winning opening; invalidate the ball according to the error occurrence, and frame decoration LED (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) / board surface decoration LED (for example, , Illumination lamp D26) and monitor LED (for example, error lamp SS3) are turned on, error display and error notification sound reproduction are performed on the effect display device SG. Further, when the power is turned on again {for example, (a) start of execution of main processing on the main control board side in FIG. 8] or when the opening detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from on to off (for example, in step 1938, the frame When the open flag is changed from on to off); the error notification is terminated. It should be noted that the all-game entrances are the first (second) main game starting port, the general winning port, the first (second) big winning port, the out port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main gaming port). A game starting port B10, a general winning port, a first grand winning port C10, a second large winning port C20, and an out port C80).

  Next, as an error related to the abnormality in winning the normal electric game item; main control board (for example, main control board M); second main game start port sensor (for example, second main game start port entrance detecting device B11s) Refer to: a predetermined number A (15 balls) in the second main game start port during the second main game start port effective period flag off-> on-> off period (a period during which the second main game start port effective period flag is on) ) When the above game balls have entered, or when more than a predetermined number B (10 balls) of game balls have entered the second main game start port with the flag off during the second main game start port effective period, or When a normal number of game balls have entered the second main game start port during the occurrence of a normal electric accessory winning abnormality (for example, during the occurrence of the error); a sub input button (for example, a sub input button SB) ), Sub input button decoration LED (not shown), other various LE Blinks or lights up, and an error is displayed on the effect display device SG {* If the error is not canceled, it ends after a predetermined time A (300 seconds)}, error notification sound reproduction {* If the error is not canceled, the predetermined time B (End after 90 seconds)}. Further, when the power is turned on again {for example, (a) start of execution of main processing on the main control board side in FIG. 8]; the error notification is terminated. It should be noted that the occurrence of an error has a predetermined number A> predetermined number B> predetermined number C that does not affect the progress of the game. Further, while the display mode of the sub input button system LED does not depend on the effect, the display mode of the effect display device SG is configured to execute error display while depending on the effect.

  Next, FIG. 74 will be described. As an error related to a prize winning abnormality, the main control board (for example, the main control board M) is: a first (second) big prize opening sensor (for example, a first big prize opening C10 entrance detection device or a second large Refer to the winning opening C20 pitch detection device); during the small hit execution, from the small hit execution flag ON to the small hit ball waiting flag ON → OFF period {for example, the first (second) big win in the small hit game When a predetermined number A (11 balls) of game balls have entered the big prize opening during the period in which the mouth valid period flag is ON}, based on the main game symbol stopped at the big prize opening during the execution of the special game When a predetermined number N of game balls have entered, when the small hit execution flag is turned off and the condition device operation flag is turned off {during the period when the flag for the first (second) big prize opening valid period is off} When a number B (3 balls) of game balls enter, it will receive a grand prize opening. When a predetermined number C (one ball) enters the big prize opening during normal occurrence (for example, during the occurrence of the error); sub input button sensor (for example, sub input button SB), sub input button decoration LED (Not shown), other various LEDs are blinking or lighting, error display on the production display device SG * If the error is not canceled, end after a predetermined time A (300 seconds)}, error notification sound reproduction {* error cancellation If not, execute END after a predetermined time B (90 seconds). Further, when the power is turned on again {for example, (a) start of execution of main processing on the main control board side in FIG. 8]; the error notification is terminated. The occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. Further, the predetermined number N is determined by the main game symbol that is stopped, and the predetermined number N can be different even for special games that are configured with the same number of rounds. The predetermined number A> the predetermined number B> the predetermined number C. Further, it is supplemented that the minimum value of the predetermined number N is the same as the value of the predetermined number A when the same big winning opening is opened.

  Next, as an error related to the start opening prize abnormality; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the first main game start port sensor and the first main game start port confirmation sensor (for example, the first main game start port) Refer to the entrance detection device A11s and the first main game start opening confirmation sensor A11s2); the first main game start entrance entrance number counter value (for example, the value of the first main game start entrance entrance counter MJ10c-A) Is greater than the first main game start port confirmation counter value (the value of the first main game start port confirmation counter MJ10c2-A) by a predetermined number (100 balls) or more; jog sensor (for example, sub input button SB), jog decoration LED (not shown) and other various LEDs are blinking or lit, error display on the production display device SG {* If the error is not canceled, end after a predetermined time A (300 seconds)}, error notification sound reproduction {* error If not released, it executes a termination} after the predetermined time B (90 seconds). Further, when the power is turned on again {for example, (a) start of execution of main processing on the main control board side in FIG. 8]; the error notification is terminated. The occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. Further, it is preferable that the first main game start port sensor is a non-contact sensor and the first main game start port confirmation sensor is a contact sensor. Further, the first main game start port sensor may be a contact sensor, and the first main game start port confirmation sensor may be a non-contact sensor.

  Next, as an error relating to a dish full tank error; a payout control board (for example, a prize ball payout control board KH); refer to a lower ball dish full tank sensor (not shown); a prize ball payout device KE or a game ball lending device R When the saucer full tank error flag is turned off to on (for example, when the saucer full tank error flag is turned off to on in step 4196-2); the payout operation is stopped, and the effect display device SG Error display and error notification sound playback. Also, when the pan full error flag is changed from ON to OFF (for example, when the pan full tank error flag is turned ON from OFF in step 4196-4); the resumption of the dispensing operation and the error notification are ended. . Note that the error notification sound is easily obtained when the predetermined main game symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and the condition device operation flag is turned on (especially, even in a special game constituted by the same number of rounds, It is configured to be played only during a special game related to a long open big hit. The detection subject may be a main control board.

  Next, as an error relating to a door opening error; a payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); a door open sensor (for example, door unit open detection sensor D18s) and a frame open sensor (for example, front frame unit open) Refer to detection sensor D14s); when the frame opening sensor changes from off to on (for example, when the frame opening flag is turned off to on in step 1934); An accessory (which is an accessory that does not hinder the visibility of other error notifications, for example, a stage opening / closing accessory D18-Y) is moved to an initial position, and a frame decoration LED (for example, a frame decoration lamp D18-L) ), Error display on the effect display device SG, error notification sound reproduction {* reproduction end after a predetermined time (300 seconds) from the occurrence of error}. In addition, when the door opening sensor changes from on to off (for example, when the door opening flag is changed from on to off in step 1928), or when the frame opening sensor changes from on to off (for example, When the frame open flag is changed from ON to OFF in step 1938); the frame decoration LED is turned off after a predetermined time A (30 seconds) after the payout operation is resumed and the error is canceled, the error display is terminated, and the error display is completed. The reproduction of the error notification sound is finished after time B (5 seconds). If the sub-control effector is configured so that it is difficult to visually recognize the error display, it is configured to make it easier to visually recognize other error displays by moving to the initial position when an error occurs. May be. The detection subject may be a main control board.

  Next, as an error related to the abnormal winning; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the second main game start port sensor (second main game start port entrance detection device B11s) and the first (second) Refer to the big prize opening sensor (for example, the first big prize opening C10 entry detection device or the second big prize opening C20 entry detection device); the second main game start opening when the flag is off during the second main game start opening validity period When a game ball enters a predetermined number A (10 balls) or more, or when the flag is off during the first (second) big prize opening validity period, a predetermined number A (10 When the ball enters the ball), turn on the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) {* turn off the light after a predetermined time A (1 second) from the occurrence of the error}. When a second number of game balls enter the second main game start port when the flag is off during the second main game start port effective period, or during the first (second) large winning port effective period When a predetermined number B (30 balls) or more of game balls have entered the first (second) grand prize opening when the flag is off; the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) is turned on. B is turned off after 30 seconds. The occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. In addition, the two error notification modes are characterized in that each error occurrence condition is different and there are two or more triggers for error notification.

  Next, as an error relating to the discharge error, the main control board (for example, the main control board M) is: an entrance sensor for all entrances (for example, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game) Start entrance ball detection device B11s, 1st grand prize opening C10 entrance detection device, 2nd big prize opening C20 entrance detection device, general prize entrance entrance detection device), and a switch for entering confirmation (particularly shown) There is no switch, but a game ball that has entered each entrance is a switch through which one or a plurality of switches that are different from the switches for detecting the entrance to each entrance are referred to; When the difference between the number counter value (for example, the number of game balls detected by the entrance sensors at all entrances) and the number of game balls detected by the entrance check switch exceeds a predetermined number (100); Display error on display SG {* Predetermined time (30 seconds from error occurrence) Error notification ends later}, error notification sound reproduction {* error notification ends after a predetermined time (30 seconds) from the occurrence of error}, frame decoration LED (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) is lit {* predetermined time (30 Seconds)) after the error notification ends. The occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. In addition, there are more error notification modes and fewer error notification end conditions than abnormal winning errors.

  Next, FIG. 75 is a signal output pattern correspondence table summarizing the identity of the signals shown in the tables of FIGS. 34, 60 (second), 64 (third), and 72 (fourth). . In the output patterns from pattern 1 to pattern 7 shown in the same figure, the same symbols (same symbols with circled numerical values) have the same ON signal output period (output mode). It is good. Note that the items indicated by “-” are excluded from the identity because they always output signals during the output period. It should be noted that in each output pattern, the magnitude relationship between the numerical values of the symbols (the values with circles) corresponds to the long / short relationship of the output periods. As for the timing of output start, the signal that starts output from a certain trigger may be configured to start output after a predetermined time (for example, 4 ms which is a timer interrupt cycle) has elapsed from the certain trigger, Conversely, a signal that starts output after a predetermined time from a certain trigger may be configured to start output from a certain trigger.

(Fifth embodiment)
In the gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Here, in the fifth embodiment, the small hit game control means MP40 that controls the processing related to the small hit game, and the time from the main game symbol variation stop timing until the next main game symbol variation start becomes possible. Fluctuation fixing control means MN30 that controls processing related to a certain fluctuation fixing time, fluctuation fixing related information temporary storage means MN30b that temporarily stores information related to fluctuation fixing time, a fluctuation fixing time timer MN30t that can measure the fluctuation fixing time, V winning opening control means MN70 for managing the validity period of the V winning opening C22 and the like, and V winning opening entry determining means MJ11-V for determining whether or not there is a winning in the V winning opening C26.

  First, FIG. 76 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is the configuration inside the second big prize opening C20. The second big prize opening C20 is configured to be opened at the time of the small hit game, and in the situation where the small prize game is performed and the V winning opening entrance detection device C26s is effective, The big hit is started when a game ball enters the ball detection device C26s). In addition, the big winning opening that can be opened at the time of the big hit is the first big winning opening C10. The V prize opening C26 will be described later. In addition, the game proceeds with a right hit (a game method in which a game ball is continuously emitted in the right direction of the game board as viewed from the player) at the time of big hit and small hit.

  Next, FIG. 77 is an operation diagram relating to the second grand prize opening C20. More specifically, FIG. 77 shows an opening mode of the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 provided in the second big prize opening C20. It is an effect | action figure which concerns on the entrance / exit of the game ball to the V winning opening C26 based on a closed aspect. In the fifth embodiment, if the game ball continues to be fired toward the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game execution (if it continues to hit the right), the second big prize opening C20 is entered. The game ball is configured to enter a plurality of balls {for example, the second big prize opening C20 (second big prize mouth electric accessory C21d) is opened as “0.2 second open → 0.8 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed ”}. Therefore, whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C26 depends on whether or not the game ball in the second large winning opening C20 is the upper shielding member C24. It is determined by whether or not the opening timing with the lower shielding member C25 is well matched. Hereinafter, the action of the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game will be described in detail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the second grand prize opening C20 has an inside (as a flow path for game balls inside the second big prize opening C20) and enters the second big prize opening C20. The second prize winning detection device C21s for detecting a ball, the V winning entry C26, the V winning entry entrance detecting device C26s for detecting the entry to the V winning entry C26, and the V winning entry C26 are entered. A second grand prize port outlet C27 that is a discharge path of the game balls that did not exist, and a second big prize port outlet detection device C27s that detects a ball entering the second major prize port outlet C27, and , A lower shielding member C25 provided above the V winning opening C26, and an upper shielding member C24 provided above the lower shielding member C25. The upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are separated from the game board. Projected state (advanced state) Therefore, the fall of the game ball is not inhibited by the closed state in which the fall of the game ball can be or can be easily inhibited and the state in which the game ball is retracted into the game board (the back side when viewed from the player). It is configured to be able to take an open state where it is possible or difficult to block (a game ball can drop) (this is a configuration like a so-called Vero-type attacker). More specifically, in the fifth embodiment, when the upper shielding member C24 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot reach or is difficult to reach the lower shielding member C25, and the upper shielding member C24 is in the opened state. The game ball can reach or easily reach the lower shielding member C25. When the lower shielding member C25 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot reach or difficult to reach the V winning opening C26. When the member C25 is in the open state, the game ball is configured to reach or easily reach the V winning opening C26. Next, a specific flow path of a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (a), a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game has passed through the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s and is then closed in the closed state. It is guided to the member C24, and stops (is placed on the upper shielding member C24) in a region formed by the upper shielding member C24 and the inner wall surface of the second large winning opening C20 (referred to as a retaining region). In the fifth embodiment, since the stopping area is configured such that only one game ball can be placed, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), a certain game ball is placed in the stopping area. If the game ball is placed, the game ball guided into the second grand prize opening C20 after the placement timing of the certain game ball collides with the certain game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24. Then, the flow path to the second grand prize port outlet detection device C27s and the second big prize port outlet C27 without passing through the upper shielding member C24 (it is impossible or difficult to enter the V prize port C26). The stopping area is configured so that the certain game ball is not pulled out of the stopping area by an impact when the other game ball collides. It is configured). Here, the right part of FIG. 77 (a) is a sectional view schematically showing the XX section in FIG. 77 (a). As shown in the sectional view, in FIG. 77 (a), the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are both closed (projected from the game board (toward the player as viewed from the player)) (the sectional view). In this case, it is understood that a game ball can be placed on the upper shielding member C24.

  Next, in FIG. 77A, when the upper shielding member C24 transitions from the closed state to the opened state (in this example, the upper shielding member C24 changes from the closed state to the opened state after 5 seconds from the start of the small hit game). The flow of the game ball when the game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24 falls below the upper shielding member C24 when the upper shielding member C24 is opened. Road) will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 (b) and 77 (c).

  Next, in FIG. 77 (b), when the upper shielding member C24 is in an opened state (the game ball falls from the position of the upper shielding member C24) and reaches the position of the shielding member C25, the lower shielding member C25 is opened. It is a figure which shows the flow path of the game ball when it is in a state. In this case, the game ball that has reached the position of the lower shielding member C25 is not prevented from dropping by the lower shielding member C25, and the V winning opening entrance detecting device C26s and the V winning are provided downstream of the lower shielding member C25. The mouth C26 can be reached. Here, the lower part of FIG. 77 (b) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the YY cross section in FIG. 77 (b). As shown in the cross-sectional view, in FIG. 77 (b), both the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are in the open state {retracted into the game board (the back side as viewed from the player) (the cross section). In the drawing, it is in a state of being accommodated in the right wall surface}, and the game ball dropped from the position of the upper shielding member C24 is lower than the position of the lower shielding member C25 without being obstructed by the lower shielding member C25. It is understood that it can fall.

  The above-described embodiment {embodiment according to FIG. 77 (b)} will be described in more detail. A substantially constant time (this example) is required until the game ball flows down from the position of the upper shielding member C24 to the position of the lower shielding member C25. , 0.2 second) is required, and whether or not the game ball that has fallen from the position of the upper shielding member C24 and reached the position of the lower shielding member C25 can enter the V winning opening C26 (whether the gaming ball has dropped). Whether the lower shielding member C25 is not obstructed) can be determined by whether the lower shielding member C25 is in an open state or a closed state after the certain time (in this example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed. Accordingly, in the fifth embodiment, when the timing at which the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state and the timing at which the lower shielding member C25 is in the open state are substantially simultaneous, the game ball is entered into the V prize opening C26. (Because both the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are in an open state for 1 second), and at a certain fixed time (in this example, Even when the upper shielding member C24 is opened as soon as 0.2 seconds), it may be possible to enter the game ball into the V winning opening C26. Further, the substantially constant time (0.2 seconds in this example) is subtracted from the opening time of the lower shielding member C25 (1 second in this example) than the timing at which the lower shielding member C25 is opened. Even when the upper shielding member C24 is opened late by the time (0.8 seconds in this example), it may be possible to enter the game ball into the V winning opening C26.

  As described above, the stopping area has a structure in which only one game ball can be stopped. Here, in this example, the timing at which the upper shielding member C24 is opened (the timing at which the game ball falls from the position of the upper shielding member C24 and exits the stopping area) is a certain time after the small hit game is executed (this example Then, after 5 seconds). When a certain game ball is placed in the stop area, as described above, the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 after the placement timing of the certain game ball is the certain game. It collides with the ball and is guided to the second grand prize port discharge detection device C27s and the second big prize port outlet C27 side. Therefore, only one game ball (game ball that can reach the position of the upper shielding member C24) can exist in the stop area until a certain time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the small hit game is started. It becomes. Furthermore, in this example, the time required for the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 to reach the position of the upper shielding member C24 is configured to be less than one second, and the second large The opening mode of the winning opening C20 (second large winning opening electric accessory C21d) is “0.2 second opening → 0.8 second closing → 1 second opening → 1 second closing → 1 second opening → closing”. Even if it is assumed that the game ball has entered the second big prize opening C20 during the third release (1 second release), the game ball reaches the position of the upper shielding member C24 to start the small hit game And less than 5 seconds. That is, in a period during which the upper shielding member C24 is in an open state (in this example, 1 second after 5 seconds to 6 seconds after the start of the small hit), a new game ball cannot reach the position of the upper shielding member C24. Or it becomes difficult to reach. As described above, in this example, when a certain small hit game is executed, the player can fall from the position of the upper shielding member C24 to the position of the lower shielding member C25 (can enter the V winning opening C26). The game ball is configured to be only one ball (only one ball per game per game).

  Next, in FIG. 77 (c), when the upper shielding member C24 is in an open state (the game ball falls from the position of the upper shielding member C24) and reaches the position of the lower shielding member C25, the lower shielding member C25 is It is a figure which shows the flow path of the game ball at the time of being a closed state. In such a case, the game ball that has reached the position of the lower shielding member C25 collides with the lower shielding member C25, which is in a state of protruding from the game board (toward the front side as viewed from the player) (closed state), and falls. It is inhibited (the ball entering the V winning opening C26 provided downstream of the lower shielding member C25 is inhibited). Thereafter, the game ball rolls on the lower shielding member C25 and is guided to the second big prize opening discharge detection device C27s and the second big prize opening discharge port C27. Here, the lower part of FIG. 77 (c) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a ZZ cross section in FIG. 77 (c). As shown in the cross-sectional view, in FIG. 77 (c), the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state {retracted into the game board (back side as viewed from the player) (in the right wall surface in the cross-sectional view). And the lower shielding member C25 is in the closed state {the state of protruding from the game board (toward the front as viewed from the player) (the state of protruding to the left in the cross-sectional view)}. It is understood that the game ball that has dropped from the position of the upper shielding member C24 is prevented from falling by the lower shielding member C25, and cannot flow down or is difficult to flow downstream from the position of the lower shielding member C25. .

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 is set to be released after a certain time from the start of the small hit game (in this example, five seconds after the start of the small hit game). The lower shielding member C25 is configured to repeat the transition between the closed state and the opened state at a constant period (in this example, a period of 4 seconds) from when the power is turned on (the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 is periodic). Under the circumstances, whether or not to enter the V winning opening C26 is mainly determined by the timing at which the upper shielding member C24 is opened (in other words, the timing at which the small hit game starts) (below) When a small hit game in which the timing at which the shielding member C25 is in the open state and the timing at which the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state is started, a game ball can enter the V winning opening C26. .

  In addition, 5th Embodiment is an example to the last, and the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are the state which cannot inhibit the fall of a game ball, or the state which can inhibit the fall of a game ball, or the state which can inhibit easily As long as the transition can be made, any structure may be used, and other configurations are not limited at all.

  In addition, as described above, in the situation where the small winning game is performed and the V winning opening entrance detecting device C26s is effective, the gaming ball enters the second large winning opening C20 and enters the V winning opening C26. Thus, the jackpot transfer right is acquired, and the jackpot is started after the small bonus game being executed is completed.

  Next, FIG. 78 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the fifth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 6200 (fifth), that is, in step 1800 (fourth), the main control board M executes the small hit game control process, and then step 6200 (fifth). Thus, the main control board M executes a V winning opening entry determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1900. Note that the small hit game control processing in step 1800 (fourth) is the same processing as in the fourth embodiment.

  Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 78 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1326-1 (fifth). After turning off the second main game flag in step 1324, the second main game random number is acquired in step 1326-1 (fifth). The determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the incoming ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the second main game symbol is changing. If YES in 1326-1 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 1328 to acquire the second main game content determination random number, and if NO, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the second main game side is configured such that the hold cannot occur (the number of holds that can occur is 0) (the main game symbol has not changed). In this case, when a game ball enters the second main game start opening B10, a random number related to the ball is acquired and temporarily held, and then the hold is digested. In this case, when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the random number related to the ball is not acquired and is not held). Although not shown, the second main game content determination random number is not acquired even when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 when the second main game symbol is in the fixed time period. (It will be handled in the same way as when changing).

  Here, when the configuration as in the fifth embodiment is adopted, it is preferable to enhance the linkage between the game progress on the main game side and the game progress on the auxiliary game side. Since game progress is controlled independently (when one game progress is performed, interlocking control that waits for the other game progress is not performed), so the linkage is improved by elaborating the time setting It is preferable to configure. More specifically, for example, (X) “average time value of variation time related to auxiliary game symbol in time-reduced game (or minimum time value when there are plural types of variation time)” + (Y) “second Total opening time of the main game start opening electric accessory B11d (total period of time when the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened and closed by one win of the auxiliary game symbol at the time-reduced game. However, if there are a plurality of types of the total period, the minimum time value may be used) ”≧ (Z)“ average time of variation time at the time of small hits (especially the second main game symbol) at the time shortening game (Or the maximum time value when there are multiple types of fluctuation time) + (W) “Wait period until the start of execution of the small hit game at the time shortening game = so-called start demonstration period (including the fixed display period of the small hit symbol) It may be) ”+ (V) Each time so as to establish a relationship with the “total opening time of the second grand prize opening C20 released at the time of the small hit game” + (T) “discharge waiting time of game balls entered in the second big prize opening C20”. It can be exemplified that time setting is performed. In such a configuration, when the game progress on the auxiliary game side is performed as (X) → (Y) (the game ball is picked up by the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the main game side When the game progress is made in the order of (Z) → (W) → (V) → (T), even if the game progress of the new auxiliary game side is being performed at the time when (T) is completed ( X) or (Y) is still continuing, and there remains a chance that the game ball is picked up by the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d. Therefore, in the case of such a configuration, the situation where the variation start condition of the second main game symbol cannot be satisfied {under the situation where (Z) → (W) → (V) → (T) is still ongoing} Then, the opening timing of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is not reached {Even if a new auxiliary game side game progress is being made, (X) is still ongoing}, the second main game symbol In a situation where the fluctuation start condition can be satisfied {under the situation after (Z) → (W) → (V) → (T)}, the opening timing of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is reached. Since {X can be completed when a new auxiliary game side game progress is being performed}, the linkage between the main game side game progress and the auxiliary game side game progress will be enhanced. (A so-called covered winning ball is less likely to occur).

  Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 20 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 6100 (fifth) and step 1435-1 (fifth) to step 1435-5 (fifth), that is, in step 1410-3, the variation mode related to the main game symbol is changed. After the determination, in step 6100 (fifth), the variation fixing control means MN30 executes a variation fixing time determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1415.

  After turning off the changing flag in step 1424, in step 1435-1 (fifth), the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 sets the determined fluctuation fixing time in the fluctuation fixing time timer MN30t (decrement timer). Start. Next, at step 1435-2 (fifth), the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 turns on the fluctuation fixing flag in the flag area of the fluctuation fixing related information temporary storage means MN30b, and at step 1435-4 (fifth). Transition.

  If the changing flag is OFF in step 1426, in step 1435-3 (fifth), the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 refers to the flag area of the fluctuation fixing related information temporary storage means MN30b, and the fluctuation fixing is in progress. It is determined whether or not the flag is on. If Yes in step 1435-3 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 1435-4 (fifth), and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Next, in step 1435-4 (fifth), the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 refers to the fluctuation fixing time timer MN30t and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1435-4 (fifth), in step 1435-5 (fifth), the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 turns off the fluctuation fixing flag in the flag area of the fluctuation fixing related information temporary storage means MN30b. Then, the process proceeds to step 1430. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1435-4 (fifth), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500). Note that the processing of the same figure is configured to execute processing related to the small hit symbol as in the fourth embodiment. Further, as a change start condition in step 1403, it is added that the game is not in the small hit game and is not in the change fixed time.

  Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 6100 (fifth) in FIG. 80 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 6102, the variable fixation control means MN30 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the game state is a time-reduced game state. In the case of Yes in Step 6102, in Step 6104, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and whether or not the symbol fluctuation is a fluctuation related to the small hit. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 6104, in step 6106, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the symbol fluctuation to be a short time (0.2 seconds in this example), and performs the next processing (processing in step 1415). ). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6104, in step 6106, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the symbol fluctuation as a long time (0.8 seconds in this example), and performs the next processing (step 1415). The process proceeds to (1). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation fixed time related to the small hit symbol in the time-reduced gaming state is shorter (than the small hit symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state, all the big hit symbols, and all the lost symbols. For a short time). The elements with different variable fixed times are not limited to this example, and the variable fixed time related to the small hit symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state may be short, or the variable fixed time related to the big hit symbol or the lost symbol. It may be a short time. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the variable fixed time when the time-reduced gaming state and the stop symbol is the small hit symbol is configured to be short. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is stopped regardless of the gaming state. If the symbol is a small hit symbol, the variable fixed time may be short, the variable fixed time of the first main game symbol is long (or short) regardless of the gaming state, and the second main game symbol The variable fixed time may be a short time (or a long time). Even in such a configuration, the output period of the signal for outputting the number of symbol fluctuations to be described later is set so that the output period is long when the fluctuation fixed time is long and the fluctuation fixed time is short. The output period may be short.

  Next, FIG. 82 is an example of a main game table in the fifth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that a small hit is provided, one type of small hit symbol on the first main game side (7AK), and two types of small hit symbols on the second main game side (2BK, 7BK) are provided. It is. In the fifth embodiment, there is no probability variation gaming state, and there are two gaming states related to the main game, a time shortening gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state. A plurality of types of small winning symbols (for example, two types of 2AK and 7AK) may be provided on the first main game side. In such a case, the difference in winning ratio between “2AK” and “7AK” may be smaller than the difference in winning ratio between “2BK” and “7BK” (for example, “2AK” is “0”). ˜450 ”,“ 7AK ”is a random value of“ 451-1023 ”). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, in the case of a non-time-reduced gaming state at the time of winning, after transitioning to a non-time-reduced gaming state after completion of a special game with “2AK” as an opportunity, “7AK” is triggered. After the special game is completed, the game shifts to the time-reduced gaming state. On the other hand, in the case of the time-reduced gaming state at the time of winning, the system shifts to the time-reduced gaming state after the special game is triggered by “2AK”. May also be configured to shift to a time-reduced gaming state even after the special game is triggered by “7AK”.

  In addition, as a configuration in this example, the time reduction gaming state transition rate varies depending on the gaming state when winning the big hit triggered by the big hit or the small hit (the ball entering the V winning opening) (the same big hit symbol) , Even if the same small winning symbol, depending on the gaming state, whether or not to shift to the time-saving gaming state is different), more specifically, in the case of the time-saving gaming state, the big hit and small winning (V winning opening) The jackpot triggered by the ball entering the ball may be configured to easily shift to the time-saving gaming state.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 78 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1504-1 (fifth), that is, if the condition device operation flag is turned on in step 1503, specific game control is performed in step 1504-1 (fifth). The means MP50 turns off the specific game flags (main game short flag, auxiliary game short flag) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to Step 1508. Thus, in the fifth embodiment, since the main game probability change flag does not exist, the process of turning off in this process is deleted.

  Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1700 in FIG. 25 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1738, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and is not after the special game is triggered by entering the V winning opening C26. (In the fifth embodiment, the special game is configured to be executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game). In the case of Yes in step 1738, in step 1739, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a short and large bonus symbol (after the execution of the special game) It is a jackpot symbol that shifts to the time-reduced gaming state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 4B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1739, the process proceeds to step 1741. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1738, in step 1740, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the short and short win symbol (end of execution of this special game) It is a small hit symbol that triggers the transition to the special game that will shift to the time-reduced gaming state later, in this example, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by 7AK · 7BK) To do. If Yes in step 1740, the process proceeds to step 1741.

  Next, in step 1741, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) to the counter value of the time-saving number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1742 and step 1742, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process {step 1800 (fourth) process}. Note that if the answer is No in step 1739 or 1740, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1800 (fourth) process}. Thus, in the fifth embodiment, when a special game is executed with a small hit game as an opportunity (when a game ball has entered the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game) Whether or not to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the special game can be different depending on the small hit symbol that has been triggered.

  Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination process according to the subroutine of Step 6200 (fifth) in FIG. First, in step 6202, the V winning opening control means MN70 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and is a conditional device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 6210, which will be described later). It is determined whether or not (a flag that is turned on when a game ball enters the V prize opening C26) during the standby time is off. In the case of Yes in step 6202, in step 6204, the V winning opening control means MN70 refers to the V winning opening entry determining means MJ11-V and determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening C26. To do. In the case of Yes in step 6204, in step 6206, the V winning opening control means MN70, within the V winning opening effective period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 6206, in step 6208, the V winning opening control means MN70 performs V winning detection detection command (not shown, but V winning detection effect for notifying that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C26). Command to be executed) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM side (sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 6210, the V winning opening control means MN70 turns on the conditional device operation reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). To do.

  On the other hand, if NO in step 6202, in step 6212, the V winning opening control means MN 70 determines the V winning opening effective period (a period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game). It is determined whether or not the process has ended. In the case of Yes in step 6212, in step 6214, the V winning opening control means MN70 turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and performs the next process (process of step 1900). ). It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1900) also in the case of No in step 6204, step 6206 or step 6212. Also, in the case of No in step 6206, in other words, in the case where the risk of unauthorized entry such as a game ball entering the V winning opening C26 increases even though the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable that the error processing is appropriately performed. The number of rounds of special games related to entering the V winning opening C26 is “15R”, and the total flow of “special games related to entering the small winning game → V winning opening C26” is totaled. Then, “1R” of the number of rounds related to the small hit game and “15R” of the number of rounds related to the special game are “16R”.

  Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 78 in the fifth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-5 (fifth), and its purpose is a table to be referenced so that a signal matching the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment can be output. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the gaming machine in step 3502, in step 3505-5 (fifth), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 5 and confirms the confirmed game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1990).

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, it is a signal of the number of symbol fluctuations; the signal that outputs the number of times of fluctuation stop (the number of final stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol; the fluctuation stop of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol Timing (for example, if it becomes Yes in step 1420); at the small stop symbol fluctuation stop timing in the time-saving gaming state, it is turned off after outputting the ON signal for 0.200 seconds, and in other cases (in the non-time-saving gaming state) At the small hit symbol change stop timing, the big hit symbol change stop timing, and the loss symbol change stop timing), the signal is turned off after an ON signal is output for 0.800 seconds. In addition, the signal is a signal of the number of symbol fluctuations; the signal that outputs the first main game symbol (the number of final stoppages) is; In the gaming state, the small hit symbol variation stop timing is turned off after outputting the ON signal for 0.200 seconds, and in other cases (the small hit symbol variation stop timing in the non-time shortened gaming state, the big hit symbol variation stop timing and At the timing of the losing symbol fluctuation stop), the signal is turned off after an ON signal is output for 0.800 seconds.

  With the configuration as described above, the right to transfer the jackpot can be obtained by entering the game ball into the V winning opening C26 in the second big winning opening C20 during the small hit game according to the fifth embodiment. In the gaming machine configured to be such that the output period of the external signal output at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the small hit symbol in the time-saving gaming state is shorter than the output period of the external signal output at other timings Thus, the signal output is appropriately executed without overlapping the external signal related to the big hit game winning and the external signal related to the big hit executed when the player enters the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game. Will be able to. Although the details will be described later, the output period of the external signal related to the big hit that is executed when the player enters the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game, From the detected timing to the timing when the big hit ends. In the non-time-reduced gaming state, it is configured so that it is impossible (or difficult) to enter the V winning opening C26 during normal game progression. Only a short-time signal output is obtained. In the time-saving gaming state, it is preferable that the variation time of the small hit symbol is relatively shorter than the variation time of the large bonus symbol, and at least the shortest variation time of the small hit symbol is the variation of the big hit symbol. It is preferable that the time is shorter than the shortest time. Also, it is preferable that the special game start demonstration time for the big hit with the stoppage of the big hit symbol is longer than the fluctuation fixed time related to the small hit symbol fluctuation (and the symbol fixed signal output period related to the variable fixed time). is there. Further, during the time-saving game, the lost symbol variation may be relatively longer than the small hit symbol variation.

(Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment)
In the gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is defined as a first modification from the fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 88 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. A change from the fifth embodiment is that a V grand prize opening V30 (not shown, but generically refers to the whole big prize opening from the honey bonus V11d to the V prize opening C26). is there. First, the flow of the game until the game ball in the fifth embodiment enters the V winning opening C26 will be described in detail below.

  First, the sorting device V16 is a winning port (functioning as a sorting device) corresponding to a small hit game that can be opened when a game ball enters the V large winning port V30. As a specific configuration, the distribution device V16 includes a V winning port C26 and a normal region V13 provided in the distribution device V16 (V large winning port V30), and a game ball for the V winning port C26 and the normal region. A guidance device V15 for guiding to any one of V13, a V winning opening entrance detecting device C26s for detecting the entering of a gaming ball into the V winning opening C26, and an entrance of a gaming ball into the normal area V13 A normal area entrance detection device V14s, a honey role V11d, and a sorting device entrance detection device V11s that detects the entry of a game ball into the sorting device V16. In each of the components installed inside the above-described distribution device V16 (V big prize opening V30), only the game balls won when the honey accessory V11d is in the open state (position indicated by the dotted line in the figure). Is reachable, and is configured to be unreachable when the honey accessory V11d is in a closed state (position indicated by a solid line in the figure). Here, the sorting device V16 includes a guide device V15 having one valve member. When the honey accessory V11d is in a closed state, the valve member in the guide device V15 is in a lowered state (shown by a solid line in the drawing). ). On the other hand, the trigger member V15 is in the open state, and the valve member in the guidance device V15 is displaced to the ascending state (position indicated by the broken line in the figure), and the honey accessory V11d is released from the open state. After a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the position is again lowered. Here, when the valve member in the guidance device V15 is in the raised state, the game ball that has flowed down is guided to the V winning opening C26, while when it is in the lowered state, the game ball that has flowed down is guided to the normal region V13. The That is, only the game balls that have entered the sorting device V16 immediately after the honey role V11d is opened are configured to be given an opportunity to enter the V winning opening C26 (the guidance device). When the operation of V15 is not normal, a guidance device abnormality error described later will occur). In the modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment, the displacement [in this example, it is a mode of rotational displacement with respect to the axis, but the mode of displacement in the vertical direction, the mode of displacement in the horizontal direction, and the displacement in the front-back direction Aspect (for example, a displacement in which a plate-like member exits or retracts from the game area D30, such as a tongue), a rotationally-displaced aspect {for example, a circular member provided with a hole is revolved (for example, counterclockwise) , A mode in which the game ball is received and guided downstream when the hole is at a predetermined position (for example, 2 o'clock), any combination of two or more of these] is provided, but there is a guiding member It may be a configuration that does not (for example, a so-called “Kroon” mode that is distributed to any of the plurality of holes according to the rolling mode of the game ball). Further, in this example, the position of the V prize opening C26 is fixed, but it may be movable {for example, on a part of the outer periphery of the rotating member that rotates from the power-on. A mode in which a specific area is provided and is configured to enter the V winning opening C26 when a game ball flows down at a predetermined position (for example, a position at 12 o'clock).

  Next, the left first main game start port A10-1 and the right first main game start port A10-2 are installed as start winning ports corresponding to the main game. Specifically, the left first main game start port A10-1 includes a left first main game start port entrance detection device A11s-1, and the right first main game start port A10-2 has a right first A main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s-2 is provided. Here, the left first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s-1 is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the left first main game start entrance A10-1, and the right first main game start entrance entrance. The ball detection device A11s-2 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the right first main game start port A10-2, and both generate main game start port entrance information indicating the entry when entering the ball. To do.

  Here, in this example, the game ball flowing down on the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while on the left side of the game area D30 (referenced on the center of the game area). The game ball that flows down is configured so as not to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10 (but is not limited to this, and the game ball that flows down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is also included. It may be configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10}.

  Here, in this example, the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily guided to the left first main game start opening A10-1, and the right first main game start opening A10- On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided to the right first main game start port A10-2, and the left first main game start It is difficult to be guided to the mouth A10-1. As described above, the left first main game start port A10-1 and the right first main game start port A10-2 are entrances having the same functional roles (the main game start port input). Game ball that flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball that flows down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). Both of these are the entry points for generating the main game start opening entry information {hereinafter, the left first main game start opening A10-1 and the right first main game start opening A10-2 are collectively referred to as the main. It may be easily guided to a game start port. However, the ratio of the game balls flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) to the left first main game start opening A10-1 (the probability of entering the ball) is the right side of the game area D30 (game area) It is configured so that the game balls flowing down the center) are higher than the rate (entry probability) of entering the right first main game start opening A10-2. In this case, a gauge configuration for reducing the rate of entering the right first main game start opening A10-2 (arrangement of game nails and windmills arranged in the game area D30) Change), or a further configuration for distributing the ball entering the right first main game start port A10-2 {for example, a hole for entering the right first main game start port A10-2; The game area D30 without entering the right first main game start opening A10-2 A hole, a so-called Kroon} with may be provided on the game region D30 for returning to. It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one main game start port is provided, and a game ball that flows down the left side (based on the center of the game area) and a right side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30. You may comprise so that both a ball | bowl may be easily induced | guided | derived to the main game starting port.

  Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of an external signal output process according to the subroutine of Step 3500 in FIG. 78 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. First, the change from the fifth embodiment is about step 3504-5 (fifth modification 1), and the purpose is to send a signal that matches the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. Adding a referencing table so that it can be output. That is, after confirming the state of the gaming machine in step 3502, in step 3505-5 (fifth modification 1), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 5-1, Based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step 1990 processing).

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the first modification from the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it. As a concrete example that can be changed, a symbol-variable signal may be output only for the number of symbol fluctuations of the first main game, may be output only for the number of symbol variations of the second main game, A signal related to the number of symbol variations common to the symbol variation of the main game and the symbol variation of the second main game may be output as long as the configuration has any one or more of these signals. Further, the output time of the signal related to the first main game may be different from the output time of the signal related to the second main game.

  First, it is a signal of the number of symbol fluctuations; the signal that outputs the number of times of fluctuation stop (the number of final stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol; the fluctuation stop of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol Timing (for example, if it becomes Yes in step 1420); at the variable stop timing of all symbols in the time-reduced gaming state, it is turned off after outputting the ON signal for 0.6 seconds, and all symbols in the non-time-reduced gaming state At the fluctuation stop timing (for example, when the answer is Yes in step 1420), the signal is turned off after the ON signal is output for 1 second. Also, a signal that is a big hit system signal; a signal that outputs that the big hit is being made (for example, that the condition device operation flag is ON) is; a big hit based on a ball entering the V winning opening C26 triggered by a small hit In this case, the timing at which the player enters the V winning opening C26 is detected, and in the case of a big hit triggered by the stoppage of the big hit symbol, the condition device operation flag is turned OFF → ON (the timing for starting the big hit); Until it is turned off (until the condition device operation flag is turned on to off) and then turned off. In addition, a signal that outputs that a big hit (for example, the conditional device operation flag is on) or a time-saving game state (for example, the main game short flag is on) is; to the V prize opening C26 triggered by a small hit In the case of a big hit based on the winning of the ball, the timing at which a ball entering the V winning opening C26 is detected, and in the case of a big hit triggered by the stoppage of the big hit symbol, the condition device operation flag is turned off → on (the timing for starting the big hit) The timing at which the main game short flag is turned off at the timing when the big hit ends (for example, the timing when the condition device operation flag is turned on), or the timing at which the time reduction gaming state shifts to the non-time reduction gaming state (for example, In the main game short flag ON → OFF), after the ON signal is output until the timing when the condition operating device flag is OFF, it is OFF It made.

  Further, it is a signal of an additional external terminal system; a signal that outputs that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game in the non-time-reduced gaming state; The timing when the game ball enters the V winning slot C26 within the V winning slot valid period (the period in which the game ball can enter the V winning slot C26 and gain the right to win the jackpot); 0.200 seconds on After that, it is off for 0.200 seconds. Also, a signal that indicates that a small hit game is in progress is; the opening start timing of the second big prize opening C20 related to the small hit game {for example, the timing when the small hit flag is turned on in step 1436 (fourth)} It is turned on until the opening time end timing of the second big prize opening C20 related to the small hit game. In addition, a signal that outputs that the second big prize opening entrance ball sensor (second big prize opening prize detection device C21s) has detected a game ball is; When the winning opening winning detection device C21s detects a game ball entering), it is turned on for 0.200 seconds and then turned off for 0.200 seconds. If the output period overlaps with other signals, the output signal of 0.200 seconds on → 0.200 seconds off of the previously output signal waits until 0.200 seconds off ends. Turns on later (waits until the running output is finished).

  Also, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that a guidance device abnormality error or discharge error has been detected; in the case of a guidance device abnormality error, it is a honey-shaped shape provided in the big prize opening. In the case where the guidance device V15 is not opened or closed at the timing to be opened or closed (not opened according to the opening mode), or in the case of a discharge error, a switch (for example, for detecting entry into the big prize opening) Compared with the number of balls detected by the second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s), it is detected by a discharge confirmation switch (for example, a ball detection device at the outlet) downstream of the switch. When the number of entered balls is larger; timing when it is determined as a guidance device abnormality error or timing when it is determined as a discharge error; after 0.200 seconds is on, it is 0.200 seconds off. If the output period overlaps with other signals, the output signal of 0.200 seconds on → 0.200 seconds off of the previously output signal waits until 0.200 seconds off ends. Turns on later (waits until the running output is finished). The guidance device abnormal error means that it is possible to recognize whether the current guidance device V15 is in an open state or a closed state by a position sensor provided in the guidance device V15. This is an error that occurs when it is determined to be appropriate depending on whether the guidance device V15 is in an open state or a state that may or may not be open. Specifically, from the start of the small hit game until the lapse of a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game, it is not an error even if it is in the open state, but it is an error in other periods, in this case, If it is detected during a big hit, it does not have to be regarded as an error.

  With the configuration as described above, when the game ball enters the V winning opening C26 in the second large winning opening C20 during the small hit game according to the modified example 1 from the fifth embodiment, In a gaming machine configured to be able to acquire the right to transfer, the jackpot will depend on whether the jackpot is triggered by a stoppage of the jackpot symbol or the ball winning at the V winning opening C26 during the jackpot game. The signal output start timings are different from each other, and a signal output mode suitable for the configuration of the fifth embodiment can be obtained.

  As in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the output time of the signal output after the main game symbol is stopped is different between the time-reduced gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the variation is fixed. Similar to the output time of the signal, the time is shortened in the time-reduced gaming state, and in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the suspension time is generated in the non-time-reduced gaming state. Even when it is not possible, by making the interval of each change longer, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing the player to feel fatigue due to the fact that the game is not progressing.

(Modification 2 from the fifth embodiment)
In the gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the first modification from the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is defined as a second modification from the fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 91 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the fifth embodiment. The game characteristics of the modified example 2 from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, the second big prize opening C20 is in an open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the small hit symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). The winning opening corresponding to the main game is located at the upper right of the out opening D36 and above the first major winning opening C10. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C24), and a V prize opening C26 serving as a trigger for the execution of a special game (in this example, a game in which the first big prize opening C10 is in an open state) to be described later, The V winning opening entrance detecting device C26s, which is a sensor for detecting the entering of a game ball, and the gaming balls that have entered the second large winning opening C20 are directly discharged out of the second large winning opening C20 or the V winning opening C26. And a sorting tool C23 for sorting whether or not to be guided once. Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Variable (exciting and changing the second big prize opening solenoid C24). In this example, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d is a flat member like the first big prize opening electric combination C11d, but the variable form of the first big prize opening electric combination C11d Unlike the above, a mode is adopted in which it is variable in the vertical direction with respect to the game board (game area D30). In other words, the second grand prize opening electrical accessory C21d is substantially completely buried in the game board (game area D30) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a retracted state) and transparent from the game board (game area D30). A state of projecting toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as an advanced state) is taken until the board D16 comes close. The second prize-winning electrical accessory C21d protrudes from the game board (game area D30) and can receive a game ball flowing down the game area D30. The box-shaped member C20-1 (the game that has entered the box-shaped member). When the ball serves as a lid for the second big prize opening C20), that is, when the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d takes a retracted state, the box-like member C20-1 (extends) While the game ball can enter the second grand prize opening C20), when the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d takes the advanced state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (and the second The game ball is not allowed to enter the inside of the big prize opening C20 (this box-shaped member is in a substantially sealed state). Then, whether the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 is directly discharged out of the second big prize opening C20 by the sorting role C23 or is once guided to the V prize opening C26. It is configured to be distributed.

  Next, the V lamp V10 is installed around the V winning opening C26 and is turned on to play an effect (the effect of notifying the player that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C26).

  The above is the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of the second modification from the fifth embodiment, but is developed on this game board prior to the description of the characteristic part of the second modification from the fifth embodiment. Outline the game content to be played. First, a game ball launched toward the game area D30 flows down a flow-down route (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a left-handed route) formed on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the game area center), The flow down (which may be referred to as the right-handed route hereinafter) formed on the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is divided into two. Here, the game ball that has flowed down on the left-handed route can have an opportunity to enter the first main game starting port A10 or the first major winning port C10, while the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is an auxiliary Opportunities to enter the game starting port H10, the second grand prize winning port C20, the second main game starting port B10, and the first major winning port C10 are obtained. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is configured to enter the first big prize opening C10 more easily than the game ball that has flowed down the left-handed route (" “Easy” and “difficult to enter” are determined by, for example, the magnitude of the number of entered balls when launching 10,000 game balls on the right-handed route and the left-handed route, respectively.

  On the left-hand route (not shown), the game ball is guided or not guided toward the first main game start port A10 by a large number of game nails and windmills. However, the number of game nails and windmills is smaller on the right-handed route (although not shown) than the left-handed route, and the game ball has a substantially uniform flow-down manner. take.

  More specifically, with respect to the right-handed route, first, a game ball launched aiming at the right side of the game area D30 (for example, when the launching intensity of the game ball by the launching device is maximum, also called right-handed) is Falling by its own weight by flying inside the game area D30 along the outer rail D32 and colliding with a stopper member (a member formed of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 Begin. Next, the fallen game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 immediately below it with a high probability, and then the flow path width exceeds one game ball and less than two game balls. The ball is collected to D50 (the ball is collected regardless of whether or not it has entered the auxiliary game starting port H10). Next, the game ball flowing down along the rectifying passage D50 is discharged from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, and then is inclined slightly to the left in the horizontal direction and has a first stage passage D51-. 1, after rolling on each of the second-stage passage D51-2 and the third-stage passage D51-3, it is discharged toward the outlet D36.

  Here, the first stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state, while the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3 are formed. The game ball passage formed of synthetic resin or the like is formed in advance by being fixed to the game board. That is, when the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first big prize opening electric combination C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 The game ball released from the rolls on the first stage passage D51-1 → The game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2 → the second The game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third stage passage D51-3 → the game ball released from the third stage passage D51-3 is released toward the out port D36. , And are configured to take a substantially uniform flow-down mode.

  In this way, since the game balls that have flowed down the right-handed route take a substantially uniform flow-down mode, if the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at an interval of about 0.6 seconds) When the player enters the game starting port H10 stably and the second large prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the open state (retracted state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (and the second big prize winning port is extended). When the ball enters stably in (C20) and the first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d is in an open state, the ball can be stably entered into the first big prize opening C10. In addition, in the space until the game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3, the second main game start opening electric role that can take the retracted state and the advanced state The object B11d is provided, and when the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d enters the advanced state, the game ball can be guided toward the second main game start opening B10.

  In such a configuration, the game ball released from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. If this happens, there is a risk that the second grand prize winning electrical accessory C21d will be damaged. Therefore, at least at the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, a configuration for scraping the momentum of the game ball flowing down (substantially dropping) in the rectifying passage D50 is essential. In the modified example 2 from the fifth embodiment, as illustrated in the vicinity of the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, the wall surface of the rectifying passage D50 projects into the rectifying passage D50. The game balls fall in a zigzag manner in the passage D50, so that the momentum of the game balls is reduced. In addition, in this example, the structure for scraping the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the 1st step path | route D51-1 with the same reason is also provided.

  Also, in the second modification from the fifth embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit on the second main game side is about 1/5 (if the second main game hold is the maximum number, any second main game hold is It is easy to win) In addition, as the flow of the game progress, “winning the big win on the first main game side (stopping the big hit symbol or entering the V winning opening C26 during the small hit) → transition to the time-saving game state → second main game Win a small hit symbol, win a big hit triggered by the small bonus → shift to non-time-reduced gaming state → win the second main game small bonus symbol with 4 remaining reserves on the second main game side It is a game that repeats the flow and acquires game balls.

  Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 78 in Modification 2 from the fifth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is that the second main game side is configured to cause up to four holds, and the configuration is the same as the process of the present embodiment. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of an external signal output process according to the subroutine of Step 3500 in FIG. 78 in Modification 2 from the fifth embodiment. First, the change from the fifth embodiment is about step 3504-5 (fifth modification 2), and the purpose is to send a signal that matches the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the second modification from the fifth embodiment. Adding a referencing table so that it can be output. That is, after confirming the state of the gaming machine in step 3502, in step 3505-5 (fifth modification 2), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 5-2, Based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step 1990 processing).

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the modified example 2 from the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, it is a signal of a big hit system; it outputs that it is in a big hit, a small hit, and a time-saving game state, that is, a state advantageous to the player; a big hit start (for example, condition device operation flag off → on ) 0.504 seconds after the timing; ON signal until the timing when the condition device operation flag is turned on → off, or when the main game time flag is turned off, or when the condition game device operation flag is turned off when the main game time flag is turned off Output. In addition, even when the condition device operation flag is turned on, when the main game time short flag is turned off at the time when the output can be finished, all the symbol fluctuations related to the hold related to the second main game side are finished. It will be on until

  With the configuration as described above, when the game ball enters the V winning opening C26 in the second large winning opening C20 during the small hit game according to the modified example 2 from the fifth embodiment, In a gaming machine configured to be able to acquire the right to transfer, the second main game is also output when a signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state is output and the game is in a big hit end and non-time-reduced gaming state. When the second main game hold becomes a big hit by configuring the output of the signal until there is no hold (if it is a big hit, the big hit is triggered by the small hit ) Will continue to be in a state advantageous to the player (a consecutive resort state), which is suitable for the modified example 2 from the fifth embodiment and the configuration of the modified example 2 from the fifth embodiment. Appropriate signal output It can be a aspect.

  In addition, in the second modification from the fifth embodiment, since the gaming machine can acquire the right to transfer jackpot by entering the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game, the excess win (accumulated total) ) Is determined so as to target 2R and later after the emission matching is matched in consideration of the emission at the small hit.

  Further, the error notification condition based on the number of differences from the fraud confirmation switch becomes stricter in the order of the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the specific area C22. However, other error notification modes, game states, and termination conditions may be the same. In addition, a small winning is provided on the first main game side, and the small winning on the first main game side is different from the small winning on the second main game side, so that the player enters the V winning opening C26. If it is a small hit to hit a player who does not play (or difficult) a ball, it is almost impossible to enter the V winning opening C26 with a small hit on the first main game side ( Since this is the case, the security outer end signal may be output when entering the V winning opening C26 at such a small hit, and not output otherwise. In addition, the fraud confirmation switch means that after passing the entrance detection sensors at each entrance (first main game start port, second main game start port, specific area, etc.) A switch installed downstream from each entrance to confirm that it has been discharged out of the gaming machine. The number of detected game balls (number of entrances detected) at each entrance is illegal. Error notification is performed based on the number of differences from the number of detected game balls of the action confirmation switch. If the difference numbers are A, B, and C and the magnitude relationship is A> B> C, the difference number of the error notification conditions corresponding to each entrance is A for the first main game start port and the second main game. The starting port is B and the specific area is C {the difference number is smaller (the error is more likely to occur) as the influence on the game result is larger}.

(Sixth embodiment)
Note that in a gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in Modification 2 from the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Here, in 6th Embodiment, it has start demonstration time timer MP30t4 which can measure the special game completion | finish demonstration time start time provided before execution of the first round in special game.

  First, FIG. 95 is an example of a main game table in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that a small hit is provided, and the small win winning rate on the first main game side is higher than the small win winning rate on the second main game side. In addition, there are various types of jackpot symbols of the sixth embodiment. Specifically, the latent loop jackpot symbol (which will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot is finished, whether to shift to the time reduction gaming state? No is a big hit symbol that will depend on the game state at the time of the big hit, details will be described later), the first latent big hit symbol (after the big hit ends, will shift to the probability variation gaming state, whether to shift to the time-saving gaming state? No is a jackpot symbol that will depend on the gaming state at the time of jackpot, details will be described later), non-probability variation jackpot symbol (it is a jackpot symbol that will shift to the non-stochastic variation gaming state after the jackpot), probability variation A jackpot symbol (which is a jackpot symbol that will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot is over) is provided.

  Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 8 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1646-1 (sixth) to step 1646-4 (sixth), that is, step 1604, when the accessory continuous actuator flag is off, step In 1646-1 (sixth), the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and displays a special game start demonstration flag (special game provided before execution of the first round in the special game). It is determined whether or not the flag that is turned on at the start of the game start demo time is off. In the case of Yes in step 1646-1 (sixth), in step 1646-2 (sixth), the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game start demonstration flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. To. Next, in step 1646-3 (sixth), the special game control means MP30 notifies the start demo time timer MP30t4 (decrement timer) to the player that the start demo time (for example, 5 seconds is a big hit). Is set) is started, and the flow proceeds to step 1646-4 (sixth). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1646-1 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 1646-4 (sixth). Next, in step 1646-4 (sixth), the special game control means MP30 refers to the start demonstration time timer MP30t4 and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. If Yes in step 1646-4 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 1606, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 97 shows a gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1700 in FIG. 96 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1745-1 (sixth) to step 1745-4 (sixth), that is, in step 1745-1 (sixth), the specific game control means MP50 is a special game. With reference to the related information temporary storage means MB20b, the jackpot symbol that is stopped is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot is over. In this example, 3A, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If YES in step 1745-1 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 1704. If NO, the process proceeds to step 1706. Further, after the main game probability change flag is turned on in step 1704, or after setting a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) in the hour / minute number counter MP52c in step 1706, in step 1745-2 (sixth). The specific game control means MP50 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped big hit symbol is a latent probability variable big hit symbol {after the big hit ends, it can shift to a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state. It is determined whether or not it is 1A · 3A} in this example, which is a jackpot symbol (the gaming state after the jackpot may be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot). In the case of step 1745-2 (sixth) Yes, the process proceeds to step 1708, and in the case of No, in step 1745-3 (sixth), the specific game control means MP50 is in the case of winning the big hit symbol of the stopped big hit symbol It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1745-3 (sixth), in step 1745-4 (sixth), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and the jackpot symbol being stopped is the first latent Probabilistic jackpot symbol (If the game state after the jackpot is the big hit in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, transition to the probability variation gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state, in other gaming state In the case of a big hit, it is a big hit symbol that will shift to a probability varying gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3A). In addition, “1A” is a latent loop jackpot symbol, and if the game state after the jackpot ends is a big hit in the non-time-reduced gaming state, it shifts to a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state, When a big hit is made in a state, it is a big hit symbol that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1745-4 (sixth), in step 1745-5 (sixth), the specific game control means MP50 determines whether the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit symbol of the stopped big winning symbol is a probability variation gaming state Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1745-5 (sixth), the process proceeds to the next process {step 1800 (fourth)}. If NO, the process proceeds to step 1708.

  Next, FIG. 98 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 8 in the sixth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-6 (sixth), and the purpose thereof is a table to be referenced so that a signal matching the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment can be output. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the gaming machine in step 3502, in step 3505-6 (sixth), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 6 and confirms the confirmed game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1990).

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, it is a signal of a big hit system; it is output that it is in a big hit and time-saving game state, that is, a state that is advantageous to the player; a big hit start (for example, condition device activation flag off → on); condition device Until the timing when the main game short flag is off when the operation flag is on → off. Note that the transition period from the stoppage of the big hit symbol to the non-time-reduced gaming state due to the big hit symbol stop also remains on.

  Next, it is a signal of a symbol variation system; a signal that outputs the number of times of variation stop (the number of fixed stops) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol; the variation of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol Stop timing (for example, if it becomes Yes in step 1420); at the small stop symbol fluctuation stop timing in the time-saving gaming state, it is turned off after outputting an ON signal for 0.200 seconds, and in other cases (non-time-saving gaming state) The small hit symbol fluctuation stop timing, the big hit symbol fluctuation stop timing, and the lose symbol fluctuation stop timing) are turned off after an ON signal is output for 0.800 seconds.

  Also, an IN / OUT signal; a signal for outputting the number of winning balls to the winning opening; output every time the payout number detection switch detects 10 gaming balls; the payout number detection switch outputs 10 gaming balls Output every time it is detected; ON for 0.128 seconds → OFF for 0.064 seconds, and if duplicated, it is turned ON after waiting for 0.064 seconds OFF to end (until the output being executed ends) Wait). In addition, the time for turning off is shorter than the time value for turning on as the output time of one signal.

  Also, it is a signal of a big hit system; output that the big hit has been executed and that the time-saving gaming state has ended; 0.504 seconds after the big hit symbol stop; the big hit end (condition device operation flag on → off), or Output from main game short flag on to off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output start timing may be set at the time of a big hit start (condition device operation flag off → on) or at the start of a special game start demonstration time. In the sixth embodiment, whether or not the signal for outputting that the time-saving gaming state has ended (that the time-saving gaming state is in effect) is continuously output after the jackpot is ended depends on the type of jackpot symbol and It is determined depending on the gaming state when the jackpot symbol is stopped. Specifically, for the first latent probability variation pattern (3A in this example), when the game is stopped in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the signal is not continuously output and the jackpot is terminated. On the other hand, when the output is finished, the signal is continuously output when the game is stopped in other gaming state. In addition, the latent loop big hit symbol (the big hit symbol that is not the first latent probability variable big hit symbol of the latent probability variable big hit symbol, and if it stops in the time-saving gaming state, it shifts to the time-reduced gaming state after the big hit ends, but the non-time-reduced game In the case of stopping in the state, it is a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the time shortening gaming state after the jackpot ends. In this example, for the 1A), the non-time shortening gaming state (the probability variation gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state) In this case, the signal will not be output continuously but will end at the end of the big hit, while the time-reduced gaming state (including both the probability variation gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state) When the operation stops, the signal is continuously output. In addition, it is not limited only to the continuation of the signal after the end of the jackpot, the special game start demo time, the special game end demo time, the signal output period related to the special game start demo time, the signal output related to the special game end demo time The period etc. may also differ depending on the type of jackpot symbol and / or the gaming state at the time of jackpot symbol stop, for example, when the first latent big hit symbol is stopped in a non-stochastic variable gaming state and a non-time shortened gaming state Special game end demo time and signal output period related to special game end demo time, and the special game end when the initial latent big hit symbol is stopped in a game state other than the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time shortened game state The signal output period related to the demonstration time and the special game end demonstration time may be longer.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment in which the probable big hit symbol, the non-probable big hit symbol, the initial latent symbol, and the latent loop symbol exist, the big hit system external signal was also won. It will be different depending on which jackpot symbol is and / or what game state was when the jackpot was won. Even in such a case, the configuration of the sixth embodiment can provide an appropriate signal output mode.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, an error occurs when the difference A between the number of winnings and the number of discharges in the big winning opening during the big hit is 100 balls or more, and the first main game starting opening A10 during the big hit and for fraud confirmation Comparing with the error when the switch detection frequency error B is 100 or more, at the big hit end timing, the accumulated value is cleared for A and the accumulated value is not cleared for B. Depending on the value of A, there are a plurality of error modes, and the error can occur even if it is not a big hit. Also, the error notification mode and the error (display) end condition may both be the same. .

(Seventh embodiment)
In the gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment to the sixth embodiment, information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is referred to as a seventh embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 100 is an example of a main game table in the seventh embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that a small hit is provided, and the small win winning rate on the first main game side is higher than the small win winning rate on the second main game side. In addition, various types of jackpot symbols of the seventh embodiment are provided, and various types of rounds that can be executed are 2R, 12R, and 16R (the jackpots are determined according to the number of execution rounds at the time of the jackpot). The production inside can be different). In the seventh embodiment, the round executed in the special game includes a short open round that is relatively disadvantageous for the player (a round in which a game ball is difficult to enter) and a length that is relatively advantageous for the player. Open round (the round in which game balls are easy to enter, and the number of rounds in which the long open round is executed is referred to as the actual number of rounds). By mixing the special game, the number of rounds in which the special game is executed (the number of execution rounds) can be made substantially different from the actual number of rounds (the number of long open rounds) that makes it easy to obtain a prize ball. (For example, in the case of “3A”, “short open round number = 8R, long open round number = 4R, substantial round number = 4R”). “2A”, “3A”, “3B”, “5A” and “5B” are all big hits of 12R, but the actual round numbers are different. It is possible to effectively execute the round notification effect display (the effect of telling the player the actual number of rounds and the gaming state after the big hit).

  Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. 47 in the seventh embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 5640-1 (seventh) to step 5640-6 (seventh), that is, after setting the command related to the jackpot start display in step 5614, or step When the special game flag is turned on in 5602, in step 5640-1 (seventh), the background effect display control means SM23 is displayed on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side. The number of rounds (in the seventh embodiment, the actual number of rounds is displayed) and the number of winning prizes are sequentially displayed (which may be executed as needed based on game play, jackpot type, etc.). Next, in step 5640-2 (seventh), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit related to the first main game symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in step 5640-2 (seventh), in step 5640-3 (seventh), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and the big hit during the execution is the maximum It is determined whether or not the round big hit (in this example, the number of rounds to be executed and the actual round number are both big hits of 16R and 7A). In the case of Yes in step 5640-3 (seventh), in step 5640-4 (seventh), the background effect display control means SM23 displays the round notification effect display (how many rounds the actual round number in the jackpot is and After giving the player the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, the command related to the final round and / or the effect of notifying the gaming state is finally set, and the process proceeds to step 5626. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in the case of a big hit related to the first main game symbol and the big round whose actual round number is not the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example), the round notification effect display is performed during the big hit. Will be executed. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, if the winning probability change big hit symbol (in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, it will shift to the probability variation gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state after the big hit ends. A jackpot symbol (1A) that is “Big Bonus Symbol” and “substantially 0R” may be provided, and in such a case, the “substantially 4R” and the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the big jackpot end. Even during special games related to “1A” and small hit games related to certain small hit symbols, the same effects (for example, round notification effect display) as the effects during special games related to “3A” to be transferred It may be configured so that it is difficult to determine whether the player is a big hit with a high profit, a big hit with a low profit, or a small hit with a player at the start of the big hit or the small hit. As a preferred configuration for making the determination difficult, when outputting the big hit system signals related to “1A” and “3A”, by starting the output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the big hit, It is not immediately discriminated whether a big win or a small win has been won, and it is possible to have a configuration that does not impair the fun of the game. Also, the timing of starting to output the jackpot signals related to “1A” and “3A” is set to the same timing, the number of execution rounds is set to the same number of rounds (for example, 12R), and the number of substantial rounds is made different. , The number of rounds indicated by the round lamp (the lamp that informs the number of execution rounds per jackpot, which always lights up when the jackpot starts), the data display device that outputs the same jackpot signal (information related to the game results, etc. to the player) Since the lamp lighting mode of the display device for notification) and the effect during the big hit are the same, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating which of the big wins is won, and the composition of the game is not impaired can do.

  Also, in the case of No in step 5640-2 (seventh), in step 5640-5 (seventh), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the big hit being executed is It is determined whether or not the lowest round big hit (in this example, 2R big hit, 2B). If Yes in step 5640-5 (seventh) or No in step 5640-3 (seventh), the process proceeds to step 5624. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5640-5 (seventh), in step 5640-6 (seventh), the background effect display control means SM23 displays the effect only for the lowest round (the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit is almost Since the game state that cannot be obtained and the game state after the big hit is a non-probability variation game state, a command related to display of an effect that informs the player that the profit is low is set, and the process proceeds to step 5626.

  Next, FIG. 102 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 8 in the seventh embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-6 (sixth), and the purpose thereof is a table to be referenced so that a signal matching the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment can be output. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the gaming machine in step 3502, in step 3505-6 (sixth), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 7 and confirms the confirmed game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1990).

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, it is a jackpot signal; a signal that outputs that the jackpot is being executed that will shift to the time-saving gaming state; a condition device related to the jackpot symbol that will shift to the time-saving gaming state after completion of execution 5 seconds after the timing when the operation flag is turned off and then on; output until the condition device operation flag is turned on and then off. In addition, the player wins a big hit in the non-time-saving gaming state and outputs that the jackpot is being executed or will be shifted to the time-saving gaming state after completion of execution or is in a time-saving gaming state; After a predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed since the condition device operation flag related to the jackpot symbol that will be shifted to the time-reduced gaming state later → on; output until the condition device operation flag is turned off and the non-time-reduced gaming state is entered. Also, a message indicating that a big hit is being made; Conditional device operation flag off → on; Conditional device operation flag on → off. In addition, it is output that the big hit and the small hit are being made; the condition device operation flag off → on or the small hit flag off → on; the condition device operation flag on → off or the small hit flag on → off. Note that the jackpot signal that is output 5 seconds after the timing of the condition device operation flag off → on described above is the type of jackpot executed by the player (the number of rounds in which the game ball can be executed, after the jackpot ends) The output start timing is delayed by 5 seconds from the start of the jackpot (the signal related to the 8R jackpot starts output at the jackpot start timing, and the 2R jackpot starts 5 seconds from the start of the jackpot). When the output is started later, it is recognized by the player). Therefore, when the big round of the maximum number of rounds (16R) is executed, the above-mentioned round notification effect display is not executed. The jackpot signal that is output after 2 seconds is configured not to be output (from the condition device operation flag OFF → ON timing) Signal force is output).

  Also, an IN / OUT signal; a signal for outputting the number of winning balls to the winning opening; output every time the payout number detection switch detects 10 gaming balls; the payout number detection switch outputs 10 gaming balls Outputs 0.004 seconds after detection; on for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds. In the case of duplication, it is turned on after waiting for 0.1 second off to be completed (wait until output being executed is completed). In addition, the time for turning off is shorter than the time value for turning on as the output time of one signal. In the case of a prize ball of 10 balls or more and less than 20 balls, the winning ball opening switch signal is turned on once, whereas the planned number of prize balls is turned on twice (on → off → on → off). Further, when the winning opening switch signal is turned on, the counted number of game balls for 10 balls may be reset (or 10 is subtracted from the counted value).

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine having various types of jackpots according to the seventh embodiment, the output timing of the jackpot external signal differs depending on the jackpot type. By configuring as described above, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot is a big hit where a player can acquire a game ball, a big hit where a player cannot acquire a game ball, a small hit, or a big hit An effect relating to the player's profit can be appropriately executed without the player knowing in advance whether or not there is any.

(Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment)
Note that even in a gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the seventh embodiment, the same information as in the seventh embodiment can be output to the hall computer HC. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is defined as a first modification from the seventh embodiment, and only the changes from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Here, in the first modification from the seventh embodiment, there is an end demo time timer MP34t5 that can measure the special game end demo time provided after the execution of all rounds in the special game is ended.

  First, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of a special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 8 in the first modification from the seventh embodiment. First, the changes from the seventh embodiment are about steps 1648-1 (seventh modified 1) to 1648-8 (seventh modified 1), that is, in step 1602, the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of step 1648-1 (seventh variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and displays a special game end demo flag (for all rounds in the special game). It is determined whether or not the flag that is turned on after execution is off. If Yes in step 1648-1 (seventh modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1604, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1648-7 (seventh modification 1).

  Also, after setting the special game end display instruction command in step 1644, in step 1648-2 (seventh variation 1), the special game control means MP30 is in the special area in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Turn on the game end demo flag. In the case of Yes in step 1648-2 (seventh variation 1), in step 1648-3 (seventh variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and executes the special It is determined whether or not the game is a special game won in the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game state). In the case of Yes in step 1648-3 (seventh variation 1), in step 1648-4 (seventh variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and stops the big hit In step 1648-5 (seventh variation 1) for determining whether or not the symbol is a probable big hit symbol (in this example, 3A, 3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B), in the case of Yes in step 1648-5, step 1648-5 In (seventh variation 1), the special game control means MP30 is set to the end demo time timer MP34t5 (decrement timer) as a long end demo time (in this example, 5 seconds, from a short end demo time described later). If it is too long, it is started and the process proceeds to step 1648-7 (seventh variation 1). It should be noted that after the special game related to the probable big hit symbol, the game is shifted to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1648-3 (seventh variation 1) or step 1648-4 (seventh variation 1), in step 1648-6 (seventh variation 1), the special game control means MP30 ends the demonstration time. The timer MP34t5 (decrement timer) is started by setting a short time (in this example, 3 seconds, which may be shorter than the long time end demo time) described above as the end demo time, and the step 1648- 7 (seventh variation 1).

  Next, in step 1648-7 (seventh variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the end demonstration time timer MP34t4 and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1648-7 (seventh variation 1), in step 1648-8 (seventh variation 1), the special game control means MP30 special game in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. The end demo flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1642. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1648-7 (seventh variation 1), the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1900). In this way, in the first modification from the seventh embodiment, the end demo time during the big hit (special game end demo time) can be different depending on the gaming state and the big hit symbol won in the big hit, Specifically, the special game end demonstration time related to the probable big hit symbol is configured to be long when the probable big hit symbol is won in the normal gaming state (when winning in the first win). If the special game end demo time is long, the effect execution time executed during the end demo time and the output time of the external signal output during the end demo time also become long. Similarly, for the special game start demonstration time, if the special game start demonstration time is long, the effect execution time executed during the start demonstration time and the external signal output during the start demonstration time The output time is also long. Also, when the special game start demo time and the special game end demo time are compared, the difference between the longest time and the shortest time of the special game start demo time (or the ratio of the shortest time value to the longest time value) and the special game end demo time. In the difference between the longest time and the shortest time (or the ratio of the shortest time value to the longest time value), it is preferable that the difference in the special game end demonstration time is larger (or the ratio is smaller). . However, due to the design of the gaming machine, no matter what the situation is, if any performance needs to be executed during the special game end demonstration time, the relationship related to the above difference (or ratio) is reversed. However, the special game start demonstration time may be configured such that the difference is larger (or the ratio is smaller). In addition, in the first modification from the seventh embodiment, the signal output period related to the special game end demonstration time when the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state shifts to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. And the signal output period related to the special game end demo time when transitioning from the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state to the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is from the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state. Transition from a non-stochastic variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state to a non-stochastic variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state from a signal output period or a non-stochastic variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state related to a special game end demo time It is preferable that the time is longer than the signal output period related to the special discrimination game end demonstration time. In addition, from the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state from the signal output period and the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state related to the special gaming end demonstration time In addition to the signal output period related to the special game end demonstration time when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening game from the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state The signal output period related to the special game end demo time at the time of transition to the state and the special game end demo time at the time of transition from the non-stochastic variable gaming state and the time shortened gaming state to the non-stochastic variable gaming state and the time shortened gaming state Also for the signal output period, the special game end time when transitioning from the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. It is preferred that the more the signal output period of the time is long.

  Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of an external signal output process according to the subroutine of Step 3500 in FIG. 8 in Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-7 (seventh), and its purpose is to output a signal that matches the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. The reference table is to be added. That is, after confirming the state of the gaming machine in step 3502, in step 3505-7 (seventh), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 7-1 and performs the confirmation. Based on the state of the gaming machine, a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1990).

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal plate in the first modification from the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, a signal of a big hit system; a signal that outputs that a big hit is being executed or a small hit game that is won during a non-time-reduced gaming state; a big hit start timing (condition device operation flag off → on), Or, at the start of effect execution of symbol fluctuation related to the small hit symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state; big hit end timing (condition device operation flag on → off), or small hit end (small hit execution flag on → off) → big prize opening Closed → Output until the end timing of the final production time. The signal is not output when a small hit game is won in the time-saving game state. In addition, a signal indicating that a small hit game is in progress is generated when the effect execution of the symbol variation related to the small hit symbol is started in the non-time-reduced gaming state; the small hit end (small hit execution flag ON → OFF) → the big prize opening is closed → Output until the end timing of the final production time. Unlike the above-mentioned signal, this signal is output when all the small hits are won. Although not shown, the small hit start demo time and the small hit end demo time are also provided for the small hit like the big hit, and the small hit start demo time and the small hit end demo time are set as the small hit symbol. You may make it differ according to the game state at the time of a stop. Also, since the opening time of the big winning opening related to the big hit is relatively short compared with the opening time of the big winning opening related to the big hit, if the start demonstration time is short, the small winning symbol will stop. Even if a game ball is launched, the chances of entering the big prize opening will be low, so comparing the small hit start demo time with the small hit end demo time, Difference (or the ratio of the shortest time value to the longest time value) and the difference between the longest time and the shortest time of the small hit end demo time (or the ratio of the shortest time value to the longest time value) It is preferable that the time is larger (or the ratio is smaller), and the difference value is larger in the small hit end demo time (or the ratio is smaller) than in the case of the big hit described above ( Or, the difference exists only at the end demo time. To) it is preferable. It should be noted that the signal output period for the small hit is from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit end demo time.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine configured to output the signal related to the small hit game execution divided into two information terminals according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment, the two information terminals Are information terminal A and information terminal B, the information terminal A is output at the time of winning the small hit in the non-time-reduced gaming state, whereas the information terminal B is configured to output at the time of winning all the small hits. Thus, the external signal output in the configuration of the first modification from the seventh embodiment can be appropriately executed.

(Modification 2 from the seventh embodiment)
Note that even in a gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the seventh embodiment, the same information as in the seventh embodiment can be output to the hall computer HC. Accordingly, the configuration in such a case is referred to as a second modification from the seventh embodiment, and only the changes from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1600 in FIG. 8 in Modification 2 from the seventh embodiment. First, the changes from the seventh embodiment are step 1649-1 (seventh modification 2) to step 1649-2 (seventh modification 2) and step 1650 (second), that is, a special game in step 1610. After the start display instruction command is set, or when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned on in step 1604, in step 1649-1 (seventh variation 2), the special game control means MP30 Referring to the related information temporary storage means MB20b, the current round is a distribution game execution round (the second big winning opening having the specific area C22 is opened, in this example, 2R / 4R) It is determined whether or not. Next, in step 1650 (second), the special game control means MP30 executes the distribution game execution process in the second embodiment described above, and proceeds to step 1638.

  Also, after turning on the special game end demo flag in step 1648-2 (seventh variation 1), in step 1649-2 (seventh variation 2), the special game control means MP30 special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. , It is determined whether or not the special game being executed is a special game won in the time-saving game state. In the case of Yes in step 1649-2 (seventh variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1648-5 (seventh variation 1) to set a long end demonstration time, and step 1649-2 (seventh variation 2). In the case of No), the process proceeds to step 1648-6 (seventh variation 1) to set a short end demonstration time. Thus, in the modified example 2 from the seventh embodiment, the probability varying gaming state after the execution of the special game is completed by the game ball entering the specific area C22 in the second big prize opening C20 during the special game execution. Configured to migrate to. The special game end demo time is configured so that the special game won in the time-reduced game state has a long end demo time.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the seventh embodiment, a specific area is provided in the special winning opening, and the game ball enters the specific area. From the seventh embodiment or the seventh embodiment, it is possible to shift to the probability variation gaming state later, and to increase the special game end demonstration time in the case of a big win won in the time-saving gaming state. Thus, the configuration of the external signal output mode similar to that of the first modification can be achieved.

(Modification 3 from the seventh embodiment)
In addition, in the gaming machine having the characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the seventh embodiment, the same information as that of the modified example 2 from the seventh embodiment to the seventh embodiment is transmitted to the hall computer HC. It can be configured to output. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is defined as a third modification from the seventh embodiment, and only the changes from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 8 in Modification 3 from the seventh embodiment. First, the changes from the seventh embodiment are step 1649-3 (seventh modified 3) and step 1649-4 (seventh modified 3), that is, special in step 1649-3 (seventh modified 3). After the game end demo flag is turned off, it is determined whether or not the game is a special game won in the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time shortened game state). In the case of Yes in step 1649-3 (seventh variation 3), in step 1649-4 (seventh variation 3), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and executes the special It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the game. In the case of Yes in step 1649-4 (seventh variation 3), the process proceeds to step 1648-5 (seventh variation 1) to set a long end demonstration time, and step 1649-4 (seventh variation 3). In the case of No), the process proceeds to step 1648-6 (seventh variation 1) to set a short end demonstration time. As described above, in the third modification from the seventh embodiment, the special game end demonstration time is the game ball in the specific area C22 until all rounds are executed during execution of the special game won in the normal game state. It is configured to have a long end demo time when a ball enters.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the seventh embodiment, a specific area is provided in the special winning opening, and a game ball enters the specific area. A special game that can be changed to a probability-changing gaming state later, and that a big win is won in the normal gaming state, and a transition to a probability-changing gaming state is made after the jackpot ends (when the special game is the first winning game). Even when the end demonstration time is long, the external signal output mode is the same as that of the seventh embodiment, the first modification from the seventh embodiment, or the second modification from the seventh embodiment. Will be able to.

  Moreover, in the modified examples 2 and 3 from the seventh embodiment, the special game end demonstration time is different depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 even if the same jackpot symbol is used. . In addition, the configuration is applied regardless of whether it is a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 or a big hit that is difficult. However, the output period of the signal related to the special game start demonstration time that is ahead of the round related to the entry into the specific area C22 does not vary depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 ( Since the presence or absence of a game ball entering the specific area C22 is not determined), it depends only on the type of jackpot symbol and / or the game state at the time of jackpot.

  In addition, as described above, when the big hit being executed is the first hit, the special game end demonstration time is configured to be long, and during the performance execution time and the end demonstration time executed during the end demonstration time. By configuring the output time of the external signal output to be long, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts the player to prevent the IC card from being forgotten during the end demonstration time at the first hit. It can be a user-friendly gaming machine. IC cards are cards for renting game balls at amusement halls, and because the game value for renting game balls is stored, forgetting to use an IC card as a sound game hall management It is important to prevent loss and theft caused by accidents. In the case of executing an effect that prompts the player to prevent the IC card from being forgotten in a gaming state other than the first hit (a big hit that will shift from the normal gaming state to the probability varying gaming state and the time-saving gaming state) In the case of a big hit that will shift from the normal gaming state to the normal gaming state, it can be determined that the player should not be executed when there is no mood because the player cannot shift to an advantageous gaming state, and the probability varying gaming state and time In the case of a big hit that will shift from a shortened game state to a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state, it can be determined that the tempo of the game in the villa will deteriorate if the effect is executed every time, and the probability In the case of a big hit that will change from the floating gaming state and the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, it suggests that the game will be terminated when the retreat is over and the player is satisfied That for directing the the resulting running player to lead to exit the game, it can be determined that it is desirable that the structure of a modification 3 of the seventh embodiment above reasons. In addition, when a big hit makes a transition from a state other than the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state to the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the time value is secured in the special gaming end demonstration and the IC card is forgotten. It is preferable to perform an effect that prompts the player to prevent this.

In this example, the normal gaming state = non-probability variation gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state, and the specific gaming state = probability variation gaming state and time-reduction gaming state are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state The relationship may be configured as follows.
(1) Normal gaming state = non-probability variation gaming state, specific gaming state = probability variation gaming state (2) Normal gaming state = non-time shortening gaming state, specific gaming state = time shortening gaming state (3) Normal gaming state = non- Probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, specific gaming state = probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state (4) Normal gaming state = non-probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, specific gaming state = probability variation gaming state And time-reduced gaming state (5) normal gaming state = probability variation gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state, specific gaming state = probability variation gaming state and time-reduced gaming state (6) normal gaming state = non-probability variation gaming state and non- Time-reduced gaming state, specific gaming state = probability variation gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state (7) Normal gaming state = non-probability variation gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state, specific gaming state = uncertain Shortening variation gaming state and time gaming state The time shortening gaming state may be the main game time reduction Furaguofu and auxiliary game time reduction flag-on (so-called easy-open state).

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the signal exemplified in this example. In addition, the following structure has illustrated the case where a predetermined group (for example, big hit symbol) and a specific group (for example, small hit symbol) are provided as the stop symbol group of the main game symbol.
(1) As the output period of the jackpot signal, the signal output related to the predetermined group is output during the special game start demonstration time, but the signal output related to the specific group is not output during the special game start demonstration time.
(2) Even for signals of a predetermined group, the output timing may differ depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit (for example, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the output timing of the signal related to the predetermined group is the first timing, specified When the output timing of the signal related to the group is the second timing, the output timing of the signal related to the predetermined group in the time-saving gaming state is the third timing).
(3) The proportion of the first main game symbol belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the proportion of the second main game symbol belonging to the predetermined group.
(3) When the output timing of the signal related to the predetermined group is the first timing and the output timing of the signal related to the specific group is the second timing, the first timing is earlier than the second timing.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the signal exemplified in this example. In addition, the following structure has illustrated the case where a predetermined group (for example, big hit symbol) and a specific group (for example, small hit symbol) are provided as the stop symbol group of the main game symbol.
(1) For special games related to the main game symbols belonging to the first predetermined group among the predetermined groups, the main game in the non-stochastic variation game state (normal game state) and in the non-time-reduced game state (in the case of entering non-easy state) The gaming state to be transferred after the special game when the symbol is stopped and displayed is a probability variation gaming state (specific gaming state) and a non-time-reduced gaming state (entering non-easy state).
(2) When the main game symbol is stopped and displayed in the probability varying gaming state (specific gaming state) and the non-time-reduced gaming state (entering non-easy state), the gaming state to be transferred after the special game is the probability varying gaming state (specific gaming) State) and a time-saving gaming state (entrance easy state).
(3) In the signal output period during the special game end demonstration time in the case of (1) and the signal output period in the special game end demonstration time in the case of (2), the output period of (2) is longer .
By configuring in this way, even with the same jackpot symbol, the transition of the gaming state can be different depending on the gaming state at that time, and according to the transition state of the gaming state before and after the special game With the special game end demo time, it is possible to determine the state of the big hit on the hall side, and to ensure appropriate gaming characteristics for the player (in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state) Do not perform the production for a long time, do not display a warning to forget to remove the prepaid card).

(Error control)
Next, FIG. 109 is a table summarizing the processing when an error occurs in the gaming machine according to the present example. The processing when an error occurs will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as an error relating to abnormal discharge of the big winning opening; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the first (second) big winning opening entrance sensor (for example, the first big winning opening C10 entrance detecting device) Or refer to the second grand prize opening C20 ball detection device); the big winning hole discharge sensor (for example, the second big prize port discharge detection device C27s) rather than the game ball detected by the big winning hole ball sensor during the big hit. Or, when there are many game balls detected by the specific area entrance detection device (for example, the specific area entrance detection device C22s); the lighting of the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L), and the effect display device SG Error display and error notification sound reproduction are executed. Further, when the power is turned on again (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1002), or when a predetermined time (300 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred; the error notification is terminated. In addition, as a configuration of the gaming machine in which the error can be executed, a game ball having a specific area and discharged from the big prize opening is configured to always pass through a discharge sensor or a specific area entrance detection device. .

  Next, as an error relating to a prize winning / entrance ball mismatch; main control board (for example, main control board M); first (second) big prize opening entrance sensor (for example, first grand prize opening C10 entry) Refer to the detection device or the second grand prize opening C20 ball detection device; the big winning hole discharge sensor (for example, the second big prize port discharge detection device) than the game ball detected by the big winning hole ball sensor during the big hit. C27s) or when there are many game balls detected by the specific area entry detection device (for example, the specific area entry detection device C22s); the main game symbol change and the operation of the big prize opening are stopped; Illumination of the frame decoration lamp D18-L), error display on the effect display device SG, and error notification sound reproduction are executed. Further, the error notification is terminated when power is turned on again (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002) or when 300 seconds have elapsed after the occurrence of abnormality. In addition, as a configuration of the gaming machine in which the error can be executed, a game ball having a specific area and discharged from the big prize opening is configured to always pass through a discharge sensor or a specific area entrance detection device. .

  Next, as an error relating to the abnormal winning opening, the main control board (for example, the main control board M) is: a first (second) winning opening entrance sensor (for example, a first winning opening C10 entry detection) Refer to the device or the second grand prize opening C20 ball detection device); when the big prize hole ball sensor continuously detects a game ball for a very long time (for example, 300 seconds); a frame decoration LED (for example, a frame decoration) Lamp D18-L) is turned on and error notification sound reproduction is executed. In addition, the error notification ends 1 second after the occurrence of the abnormality, but when the number of detections causing the error is 10 or more in total, the detection and the sound effect are the total of 30 or more detections that cause the error. In some cases, the process ends 30 seconds after the occurrence of the abnormality.

  Next, as a guidance device abnormality error; the main control board (for example, the main control board M) has detected a difference from the normal operation of the guidance device V15 inside the big prize opening by the guidance device solenoid of the guidance device V15; If the total number of detections causing the error is five times or more; error display is performed on the effect display device SG, and the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) is turned on; Exit.

  Next, as the first main game start opening error; the main control board (for example, the main control board M) is; a first main game start opening entrance sensor (first main game start entrance entrance detecting device from when the power is turned on) When the difference between the number of game balls detected by A11s) and the number of game balls detected by the cheating sensor is greater than or equal to a predetermined number; error display on the effect display device SG, frame decoration LED (for example, frame decoration lamp) D18-L) is turned on; if the power is turned on again, and the power is not turned on again, the error display is terminated after 300 seconds from the occurrence of the error, and the output of the sound effect is terminated after 90 seconds from the occurrence of the error.

  Next, as the second main game start opening error; refer to the case where the player enters the second main game start opening in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the big hit and the small hit; the frame decoration LED (For example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) is turned on and error notification sound reproduction is executed. Further, the error notification is terminated when power is turned on again (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002) or when 300 seconds have elapsed after the occurrence of abnormality. This configuration is applied to a gaming machine that does not have a holding function on the second main game side. After the error is detected, the error is detected again until the first main game symbol is changed five times, or before the first main game symbol is changed, the player enters the V winning opening C26 or waits for a demonstration. An error notification is executed when the player enters the V prize opening C26 before the screen is displayed.

  Next, as an electric prize abnormal winning error, non-time-reduced gaming state: when one game ball enters the second main game start opening; various LEDs are lit; End in seconds. In addition, as an abnormal winning prize of the electric component, the time-saving game state and the electric agent effective period. If six game balls enter the second main game starting port, the time-saving game state and the electric agent effective Outside the period: When five game balls enter the second main game start opening, after a time-saving gaming state and the occurrence of the abnormality ... When one game ball enters the second main game start opening ; Interruption of main game symbol variation and winning prize opening operation; error display on effect display device SG, frame decoration LED (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) lighting, error notification sound reproduction; It is released from the error by turning on the power again while opening.

The external signal output mode and error execution mode in this example may be applied to the following gaming machines.
(1) There are a first main game and a second main game, and the symbol variation on the second main game side is executed with priority over the symbol variation on the first main game side (similar to this embodiment).
(2) It has a specific area (similar to Modification 2 from the seventh embodiment).
(3) On the first main game side, the percentage of jackpots that will be the maximum profit in the expected value of winning the winning ball is higher than that on the second main game side.
(4) On the second main game side, the ratio of big hits that are easy to enter the specific area C22 is higher than that on the first main game side.
(5) The average number of rounds executed by the big hit on the first main game side and the big hit on the second main game side are the same.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (1)
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that executes the main game;
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game;
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can take an open state and a closed state, and in the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port) The game ball can enter the entrance B10) or can enter easily compared to the closed state. In the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Or a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter compared to the open state,
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21) that acquires a first random number triggered by a game ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10). -A)
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game random determination means) MN11-A),
First identification information display content for determining stop first identification information which is a stop display mode of the first identification information, based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A). Determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A);
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stopped first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first random determination means (for example, the first main game random determination means MN11-A) First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A) for temporarily storing the first random number as hold until the determination of whether or not the game is successful is permitted,
A second random number acquisition unit (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21) that acquires a second random number when a game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). -B),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the second determination unit (for example, the second main game random determination unit) MN11-B)
Second identification information display content for determining stop second identification information, which is a stop display mode of the second identification information, based on a result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B). Determining means (for example, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B);
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop second identification information after the information is variably displayed;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the second determination result determination means (for example, the second main game random determination means MN11-B) A second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the second random number as a hold until permission determination by the
After the first stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) is winning, the second success / failure determination means ( For example, after the stop second identification information is stopped and displayed when the determination result of the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B is winning, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second This is a means for executing a special game that makes the two big prize winning openings C20) advantageous to the player. The execution contents of the special game include a first special game and a specific area (for example, a specific game). Special game control means (for example, special game control) that has a second special game that makes it easy to enter the region C22) and executes the special game with the execution contents of either the first special game or the second special game Means MP30 And,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. Lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling the player to enter a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game when a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered; ,
The shortest period that the variable identification period of the first identification information can take, or the shortest period that the minimum display period that the variable identification period of the second identification information can take is the predetermined period, and the shortest period that the fluctuation display period of the first identification information can take The shortest period that can be taken by the period or the variable display period of the second identification information has a short-term fluctuation state in which the shortest period is shorter than the predetermined period, and the short-term fluctuation state is controlled after the execution of the special game. A variable state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50), and when there is a hold in the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B), a first determination of success / failure Means (for example, first main game winning lottery means MN11-A) is not permitted to be determined, while the first random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) has a hold. Regardless of whether or not, it is configured so that the determination of success / failure by the second success / failure determination means (for example, the second main game winning / rejection lottery means MN11-B) can be permitted, and the second success / failure determination means (for example, first (2) Main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is the winning determination result, the first winning / non-winning determining means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is the winner. It is configured so that special games are easier to be executed in the second special game than if there were,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Based on the game ball entering the auxiliary game starting port (for example, auxiliary game starting port H10), the auxiliary game random number related to the open state driving of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is acquired. Auxiliary game random number acquisition means (for example, auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H),
Based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means (for example, auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H), the auxiliary game identification information display content determination means (for example, determines the stop identification information of the auxiliary game identification information) Auxiliary game winning / not-lotting means MN11-H, auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H),
Based on the determination by the auxiliary game identification information display content determination means (for example, auxiliary game win / fail lottery means MN11-H, auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H), an auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g). Auxiliary game identification information display control means (for example, auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information of the auxiliary game identification information after the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed at
After the stop identification information of the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, it is possible to execute an easy-to-play game in which the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is driven and controlled to be opened. Variable member opening control means (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening and closing control means MP20-B),
Auxiliary game normal game state and auxiliary game-specific game state in which easy-to-enter games are easier to be executed than in the auxiliary game normal game state, and the auxiliary is controlled so that it can be set to the auxiliary game-specific game state after the execution of the special game A game state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50), and is configured to enter an auxiliary game specific game state when in a short-term fluctuation state;
As external output information to output from pachinko gaming machine to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information and the second information separately,
The first information is information indicating that a special game is being executed and information indicating a short-term fluctuation state, and the second information is a specific area (for example, at the time of execution of a special game related to the first special game) The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be information indicating that there is a ball entering the specific area C22).

Pachinko machines related to this concept (2)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
First success determination means (for example, first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) that performs a success / failure determination upon the entry of a game ball into the first start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10). When,
Second success / failure determination means (for example, second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B) that executes a success / failure determination triggered by a game ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10). When,
When the result of the winning / non-winning determination by the first winning / non-winning determining means (for example, the first main game winning / non-drawing lottery means MN11-A) is won or the second winning / non-winning determining means (for example, the second main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-B) If the result of the determination of success / failure by) is winning, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is provided,
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko machine to the outside, the first information, the second information and the third information are configured to be output separately,
The first information is information indicating that one ball has entered the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10), and the second information is the second start port (for example, the second start port (for example, the second main game start port A10)). It becomes information that there was one ball entering the main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10) and / or the second start port (for example, , The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the second main game start opening B10) is configured to be information indicating that the predetermined number has been reached,
The first information is output when one ball enters the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and the second information is the second starting point. One piece of information is output in response to one ball entering the mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start point). One information is output when the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the mouth A10) and / or the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) has reached a predetermined number,
When outputting the one information, an output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and some kind of external output information (described above) Any one of the first information to the third information, for example, when outputting one information in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any one of the first information to the third information described above) For example, when it is during the output period of the previously output one information in the first information), the certain type of external output information (the first information to the third information described above) , For example, after the output period of the first information output in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the third information described above, for example, the first information) It is configured to output one information in And when outputting one information in a certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the third information described above, for example, the first information), the certain type of external output Even if it is during the output period of one information in the external output information of a different type from the information (any of the first information to the third information described above, for example, the second information), the certain type of external output information A pachinko gaming machine configured to output one information in output information (any one of the first information to the third information described above, for example, the first information).

Pachinko machines related to this concept (2)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First success determination means (for example, first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) that performs a success / failure determination upon the entry of a game ball into the first start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10). When,
First identification information display content for determining stop first identification information which is a stop display mode of the first identification information, based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A). Determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A);
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stopped first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
Second success / failure determination means (for example, second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B) that executes a success / failure determination triggered by a game ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10). When,
Second identification information display content for determining stop second identification information, which is a stop display mode of the second identification information, based on a result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B). Determining means (for example, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B);
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop second identification information after the information is variably displayed;
After the first stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) is winning, For example, special game control means for executing a special game advantageous to the player after the stop second identification information is stopped and displayed when the determination result of the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning. (For example, special game control means MP30),
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information, the second information, the third information, the fourth information and the fifth information are configured to be output separately,
The first information is information indicating that one ball has entered the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10), and the second information is the second start port (for example, the second start port (for example, the second main game start port A10)). It becomes information that there was one ball entering the main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10) and / or the second start port (for example, , Information indicating that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the second main game start opening B10) has reached a predetermined number, and the fourth information is the first start opening (for example, the first main game start start) Mouth A10) or the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is information indicating that there has been one ball, and the fifth information is stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed. It is configured to be displayed information,
The first information is output when one ball enters the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and the second information is the second starting point. One piece of information is output in response to one ball entering the mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start point). One information is output when the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the mouth A10) and / or the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) has reached a predetermined number, The fourth information is triggered by the fact that there is a single entry into the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) or the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Information is output,
When outputting the one information, an output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and some kind of external output information (described above) Any one of the first information to the fourth information, for example, in the case of outputting one information in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any one of the first information to the fourth information described above) For example, when it is during the output period of the previously output one information in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the fourth information described above) , For example, after the output period of the first information output in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the fourth information described above, for example, the first information) It is configured to output one information in And when outputting one information in a certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the fourth information described above, for example, the first information), the certain type of external output Even if it is during the output period of one information in the external output information of a different type from the information (any of the first information to the fourth information described above, for example, the second information), the certain type of external output information It is configured to output one information in the output information (any of the first information to the fourth information described above, for example, the first information),
When the first identification information is in a variable display, the first identification information is not newly displayed in a variable display. When the fifth information is output, the first identification information is displayed in a variable display. In response to the fact that it is stopped and displayed after that, it is configured to output a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and the shortest period in the variable display period of the first identification information is longer than the predetermined period. This is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured as described above.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (3)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First success determination means (for example, first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) that performs a success / failure determination upon the entry of a game ball into the first start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10). When,
First identification information display content for determining stop first identification information which is a stop display mode of the first identification information, based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A). Determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A);
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stopped first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
Second success / failure determination means (for example, second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B) that executes a success / failure determination triggered by a game ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10). When,
Second identification information display content for determining stop second identification information, which is a stop display mode of the second identification information, based on a result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B). Determining means (for example, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B);
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop second identification information after the information is variably displayed;
After the first stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) is winning, For example, special game control means for executing a special game advantageous to the player after the stop second identification information is stopped and displayed when the determination result of the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning. (For example, special game control means MP30),
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information, the second information, the third information, the fourth information and the fifth information are configured to be output separately,
The first information is information indicating that one ball has entered the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10), and the second information is the second start port (for example, the second start port (for example, the second main game start port A10)). It becomes information that there was one ball entering the main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10) and / or the second start port (for example, , Information indicating that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the second main game start opening B10) has reached a predetermined number, and the fourth information is the first start opening (for example, the first main game start start) Mouth A10) or the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is information indicating that there has been one ball, and the fifth information is stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed. It is configured to be displayed information,
The first information is output when one ball enters the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and the second information is the second starting point. One piece of information is output in response to one ball entering the mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start point). One information is output when the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the mouth A10) and / or the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) has reached a predetermined number, The fourth information is triggered by the fact that there is a single entry into the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) or the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Information is output,
When outputting the one information, an output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and some kind of external output information (described above) Any one of the first information to the fourth information, for example, in the case of outputting one information in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any one of the first information to the fourth information described above) For example, when it is during the output period of the previously output one information in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the fourth information described above) , For example, after the output period of the first information output in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the fourth information described above, for example, the first information) It is configured to output one information in And when outputting one information in a certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the fourth information described above, for example, the first information), the certain type of external output Even if it is during the output period of one information in the external output information of a different type from the information (any of the first information to the fourth information described above, for example, the second information), the certain type of external output information It is configured to output one information in the output information (any of the first information to the fourth information described above, for example, the first information),
When the first identification information is in a variable display, the first identification information is not newly displayed in a variable display. When the fifth information is output, the first identification information is displayed in a variable display. In response to the fact that it is stopped and displayed after that, it is configured to output a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and the shortest period in the variable display period of the first identification information is longer than the predetermined period. This is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured as described above.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (4)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21) that acquires a first random number triggered by a game ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10). -A)
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game random determination means) MN11-A),
First identification information display content for determining stop first identification information which is a stop display mode of the first identification information, based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A). Determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A);
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stopped first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
A second random number acquisition unit (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21) that acquires a second random number when a game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). -B),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the second determination unit (for example, the second main game random determination unit) MN11-B)
Second identification information display content for determining stop second identification information, which is a stop display mode of the second identification information, based on a result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B). Determining means (for example, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B);
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop second identification information after the information is variably displayed;
After the first stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) is winning, the second success / failure determination means ( For example, after the stop second identification information is stopped and displayed when the determination result of the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B is winning, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second This is a means for executing a special game that makes the two big prize winning openings C20) advantageous to the player. The execution contents of the special game include a first special game and a specific area (for example, a specific game). Special game control means (for example, special game control) that has a second special game that makes it easy to enter the region C22) and executes the special game with the execution contents of either the first special game or the second special game Means MP30 And,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. Lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling the player to enter a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game when a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered; With
As external output information to output from pachinko gaming machine to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information and the second information separately,
The first information is information that a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) has been entered at the time of execution of the special game related to the first special game, and the second information is at the time of execution of the special game. Is configured to be information indicating that there has been an illegal entry to a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20),
The first information is output when a special area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered at the time of execution of the special game related to the first special game (however, in the second special game, the variable is variable) If it is easy to enter the specific area by opening the variable prize opening for a long period of time after opening the prize opening for a short period of time, The second information may be a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening) when the special game is executed, regardless of whether the second information is the first special game or the second special game. C10, a pachinko gaming machine that is configured to be output in response to an illegal entry to the second grand prize opening C20).

Pachinko machines related to this concept (5)
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) provided on a game area (for example, the game area D30) and capable of entering a game ball;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) provided on the game area (for example, the game area D30) and capable of entering a game ball;
A collection path (for example, a flow path to which a total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is attached) for collecting game balls that have been driven onto the game area (for example, the game area D30);
First success determination means (for example, first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) that performs a success / failure determination upon the entry of a game ball into the first start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10). When,
Second success / failure determination means (for example, second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B) that executes a success / failure determination triggered by a game ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10). When,
When the result of the winning / non-winning determination by the first winning / non-winning determining means (for example, the first main game winning / non-drawing lottery means MN11-A) is won or the second winning / non-winning determining means (for example, the second main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-B) If the result of the determination of success / failure by) is winning, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is provided,
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko machine to the outside, the first information, the second information and the third information are configured to be output separately,
The first information is information indicating that one ball has entered the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10), and the second information is the second start port (for example, the second start port (for example, the second main game start port A10)). The third information is the number of game balls that have passed through the collection path (for example, the flow path to which the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is attached). Is configured to be information that has reached the predetermined number,
The first information is output in response to a single ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and the second information is output as the second starting port (for example, The third information is output when there is a single entry to the second main game start opening B10), and the third information passes through the recovery path (for example, the flow path to which the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is attached). The number of game balls that have been reached has reached a predetermined number that is more than one, and after reaching the predetermined number, the number of gaming balls that have reached the predetermined number as a starting point is output (for example, When the predetermined number is set to 10, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to be output when the number reaches 10 and then output when the number reaches 10.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (6)
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) provided on a game area (for example, the game area D30) and capable of entering a game ball;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) provided on the game area (for example, the game area D30) and capable of entering a game ball;
A collection path (for example, a flow path to which a total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is attached) for collecting game balls that have been driven onto the game area (for example, the game area D30);
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21) that acquires a first random number triggered by a game ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10). -A)
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game random determination means) MN11-A),
First identification information display content for determining stop first identification information which is a stop display mode of the first identification information, based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A). Determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A);
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stopped first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first random determination means (for example, the first main game random determination means MN11-A) First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A) for temporarily storing the first random number as hold until the determination of whether or not the game is successful is permitted,
A second random number acquisition unit (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21) that acquires a second random number when a game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). -B),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the second determination unit (for example, the second main game random determination unit) MN11-B)
Second identification information display content for determining stop second identification information, which is a stop display mode of the second identification information, based on a result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B). Determining means (for example, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B);
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop second identification information after the information is variably displayed;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the second determination result determination means (for example, the second main game random determination means MN11-B) A second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the second random number as a hold until permission determination by the
After the first stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) is winning, the second success / failure determination means ( For example, special game control means for executing a special game advantageous to the player after the stop second identification information is stopped and displayed when the determination result of the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning. (For example, special game control means MP30), and when there is a hold in the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B), the first win / fail determination means (for example, Whether or not the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is determined to be successful or not, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) has a hold. Regardless, it is configured so that the determination of success / failure by the second winning / failing determining means (for example, the second main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-B) can be permitted, and the second starting port (for example, the second main gaming starting port) The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry to B10) is configured to be smaller than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry to the first start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10). And
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information, the second information, the third information, and the fourth information are configured to be output separately,
The first information is information indicating that one ball has entered the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10), and the second information is the second start port (for example, the second start port (for example, the second main game start port A10)). The third information is the number of game balls that have passed through the collection path (for example, the flow path to which the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is attached). And the fourth information is configured to be information indicating that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed after being variably displayed,
The first information is output when one ball enters the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and the second information is the second starting point. One piece of information is output when there is a single entry into the mouth (for example, the second main game start opening B10), and the third information is stored in the collection path (for example, the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). The number of game balls that have passed through the attached flow path) has reached a predetermined number that is more than one, and after reaching the predetermined number, that the predetermined number has been reached as a starting point It is output as a trigger (for example, when the predetermined number = 10 is set, it is output when 10 is reached, and then is output when 10 is reached),
When outputting the one information, an output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and some kind of external output information (described above) Any one of the first information to the third information, for example, when outputting one information in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any one of the first information to the third information described above) For example, when it is during the output period of the previously output one information in the first information), the certain type of external output information (the first information to the third information described above) , For example, after the output period of the first information output in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the third information described above, for example, the first information) It is configured to output one information in And when outputting one information in a certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the third information described above, for example, the first information), the certain type of external output Even if it is during the output period of one information in the external output information of a different type from the information (any of the first information to the third information described above, for example, the second information), the certain type of external output information It is configured to output one information in the output information (the first information to the third information described above, for example, the first information),
When outputting the fourth information, it is configured to output a predetermined signal over a predetermined period triggered by the fact that the first identification information or the second identification information is variably displayed and then stopped. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by that.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (7)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port) through which game balls can enter;
A winning-port entrance detection unit (for example, detecting the entrance of a game ball into each winning port in the plurality of winning ports (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the general winning port) , First main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, general winning entrance entrance entrance detection device),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
A variable winning opening detection unit (for example, a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s, for example) that detects a game ball entering a variable winning opening (for example, a first large winning opening C10, a second large winning opening C20), A second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s),
Predetermined winning ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second winning port) among the plurality of winning ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port). A win / fail judgment means (for example, a first main game win / fail lottery means MN11-A, a second main game pass / fail lottery means MN11-B) that executes a win / no-go judgment triggered by a game ball entering the main game start opening B10). When,
If the result of the winning / non-winning determination by the winning / non-winning determining means (for example, the first main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-B) is a winning combination, C10, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that makes the second big prize opening C20) an advantageous state for the player,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, at least the first information is configured to be output,
The first information includes information indicating that there has been an illegal entry to any of the plurality of winning holes (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, and the general winning port); It is configured to be information indicating any of the information indicating that there has been an illegal entry into a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20), and the illegal It is configured to be output as the same signal when triggered by satisfying at least one of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition for determining that there has been a complete entry,
The first condition is that a period from when a game ball enters a certain winning opening until a further game ball enters the certain winning hole is determined in advance. The second condition is satisfied when the number of satisfied times within a predetermined period reaches a predetermined number of times, and the second condition continues to detect the entry of a game ball over a predetermined period at a winning opening. The third condition is that the number of detected game balls entering a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) during the execution of the special game. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be satisfied when the number exceeds a predetermined number.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (8)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A specific entrance where a game ball can enter (for example, a specific entrance H10),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution execution) for acquiring a random number triggered by a game ball entering the start port (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10) Means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the validity determination means (for example, First main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-A, second main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-B),
Identification for determining stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of identification information, based on the result of the determination by the determination unit (for example, the first main game winning / not determining lottery unit MN11-A, the second main game winning / not determining lottery unit MN11-B) Information display content determination means (for example, first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, second main game symbol determination means MN41-B);
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the second main game symbol display unit B21g). MP11-C),
After the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the case where the determination result is a winning result by the winning determination means (for example, the first main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-B), Special gaming state transition right granting means (for example, special gaming control means MP30) for granting a right to transition to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player
After the right to transfer to the special gaming state is granted, the game ball is placed in the specific entrance (for example, the specific entrance H10) in a state where the granted transfer right is not yet exercised. When entering a ball, special gaming state transfer right exercise control means (for example, special gaming control means MP30) for exercising the right to shift to the special gaming state that is not exercised to shift to the special gaming state;
When the special game state is entered, a special game control means (for example, a special game control means for executing a special game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player) Game control means MP30),
There is a long-term fluctuation state in which the shortest period that the identification information fluctuation display period can take is a predetermined period, and a short-term fluctuation state in which the shortest period that the identification information fluctuation display period can take is shorter than the predetermined period. And a change state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls to be in a short-term change state after completion of execution of the special game, and the right to transition to the special game state is in an unexercised state , The right to transition to the special gaming state is not exercised until the game ball enters the specific entrance (for example, the specific entrance H10),
As external output information to output from pachinko gaming machine to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information and the second information separately,
The first information includes information that the right to transition to the special gaming state is in an unexecuted state and that the special game is being executed when the right to transition to the special gaming state that has not been exercised is exercised. It becomes information indicating any of the information, the second information is information that the right to transition to the special gaming state is in an unexercised state, the information at the time of exercising the right to transition to the special gaming state that has not been exercised The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be information indicating either information indicating that a special game is being executed or information indicating that the game is in a short-term fluctuation state.
Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (8) may have the following configuration.
The first information and the second information are configured to be output when a predetermined period has elapsed after the stop display of the stop identification information to which the right to transition to the special gaming state is granted. The second information can be determined according to the type of stop identification information to which the right to transition to the special game state will be granted whether or not the state changes to a short period after the execution of the special game ends. The output duration is different depending on the type of the stop identification information.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (9)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A specific entrance where a game ball can enter (for example, a specific entrance H10),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution execution) for acquiring a random number triggered by a game ball entering the start port (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10) Means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the validity determination means (for example, First main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-A, second main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-B),
Identification for determining stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of identification information, based on the result of the determination by the determination unit (for example, the first main game winning / not determining lottery unit MN11-A, the second main game winning / not determining lottery unit MN11-B) Information display content determination means (for example, first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, second main game symbol determination means MN41-B);
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the second main game symbol display unit B21g). MP11-C),
In a case where the result of the determination by the winning / failing determining means (for example, the first main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-A, second main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the stop identification information is the first stop identifying information or the first stop identifying information. A special game state transition right granting means (for example, special game control means MP30) for granting a right to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player after being stopped and displayed by the two stop identification information;
After the right to transfer to the special gaming state is granted, the game ball is placed in the specific entrance (for example, the specific entrance H10) in a state where the granted transfer right is not yet exercised. When entering a ball, special gaming state transfer right exercise control means (for example, special gaming control means MP30) for exercising the right to shift to the special gaming state that is not exercised to shift to the special gaming state;
After the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the third stop identification information, the special game automatic transition control is performed so that the game ball shifts to the special game state without entering the specific entrance (for example, the specific entrance H10). Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
When the first stop identification information or the second stop identification information is stopped and displayed, the game proceeds to the special gaming state. For example, the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) is a unit game in which the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player until there is a predetermined number of balls entering C20) or until a predetermined period elapses. Can be executed multiple times, and if the third stop identification information is stopped and displayed and the game is shifted to the special game state, a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize) The player receives a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) until there is a predetermined number of balls in the mouth C10, the second big prize opening C20) or until a predetermined period elapses. Special to execute unit games that are in a favorable state for the game once Special game control means capable of performing the technique (for example, special game controller MP30, Koatari game control means MP 40),
The execution result of the special game has a low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. Lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling so that it can be in a high probability lottery state later,
There is a long-term fluctuation state in which the shortest period that the identification information fluctuation display period can take is a predetermined period, and a short-term fluctuation state in which the shortest period that the identification information fluctuation display period can take is shorter than the predetermined period. And a change state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls to be in a short-term change state after completion of execution of the special game, and the right to transition to the special game state is in an unexercised state The right to enter the special game state is not exercised until the game ball enters the specific entrance (for example, the specific entrance H10), and the first stop identification information is stopped and displayed. After the execution of the special game due to the event, the high-probability lottery state and the long-term fluctuation state are entered, and after the execution of the special game due to the second stop identification information being stopped and displayed, the high probability Before and after the execution of the special game due to the fact that the third stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the lottery state and the short-term fluctuation state, the gaming state and the long-term fluctuation state related to the high probability lottery state and the low probability lottery state, and It is configured not to change the gaming state related to the short-term fluctuation state,
As external output information to output from pachinko gaming machine to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information and the second information separately,
The first information includes information that the right to transition to the special gaming state is in an unexecuted state and that the special game is being executed when the right to transition to the special gaming state that has not been exercised is exercised. It becomes information indicating any of the information, the second information is information that the right to transition to the special gaming state is in an unexercised state, the information at the time of exercising the right to transition to the special gaming state that has not been exercised Information indicating that the special game is being executed, information indicating that at least the special game is being executed due to the third stop identification information being stopped and displayed, and third stop identification information being stopped and displayed The period until the variable display of the identification information becomes possible after the execution of the special game due to the event (for example, this period is provided as a period for production although the above-described variable winning opening is not opened) Period, yes Is configured so that information indicating one of information indicating a possible) be mentioned to be a loose demonstration period after Koatari,
In the second information, information indicating a period until the variable information can be displayed after the execution of the special game due to the third stop identification information being stopped is displayed. Sometimes it is output over the first period if it is in a long-term fluctuation state, and it is output over the second period if it is in a short-term fluctuation state at the start of execution of the special game. The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the second period is shorter than the first period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (10)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution execution) for acquiring a random number triggered by a game ball entering the start port (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10) Means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the validity determination means (for example, First main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-A, second main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-B),
Identification for determining stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of identification information, based on the result of the determination by the determination unit (for example, the first main game winning / not determining lottery unit MN11-A, the second main game winning / not determining lottery unit MN11-B) Information display content determination means (for example, first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, second main game symbol determination means MN41-B);
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the second main game symbol display unit B21g). MP11-C),
In a case where the result of the determination by the winning / failing determining means (for example, the first main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-A, second main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the stop identification information is the first stop identifying information or the first stop identifying information. When the stop display is made with the two-stop identification information, there is a predetermined number of balls entering a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) or a predetermined period elapses. Up to a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) can execute a special game that executes a unit game a plurality of times in an advantageous state for the player, and the stop identification information is When the stop display is made with the third stop identification information, there is a predetermined number of balls in the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) or the predetermined period has elapsed. Variable prize opening (for example, 1st Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30, small hit game control) capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed once, which makes the winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player. Means MP40);
The execution result of the special game has a low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. Lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling so that it can be in a high probability lottery state later,
There is a long-term fluctuation state in which the shortest period that the identification information fluctuation display period can take is a predetermined period, and a short-term fluctuation state in which the shortest period that the identification information fluctuation display period can take is shorter than the predetermined period. And a variation state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) for controlling the state so as to be in a short-term variation state after completion of the execution of the special game, and special due to the first stop identification information being stopped and displayed. After the execution of the game, the high-probability lottery state and the long-term fluctuation state, and after the execution of the special game due to the second stop identification information being stopped and displayed, the high-probability lottery state and the short-term fluctuation state Before and after the execution of the special game due to the third stop identification information being stopped and displayed, the game state and the long-term fluctuation state related to the high probability lottery state and the low probability lottery state And the gaming state of the short-term variation state is configured so as not to change,
As external output information to output from pachinko gaming machine to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information and the second information separately,
The first information is information indicating that the special game is being executed due to the first stop identification information or the second stop identification information being stopped and displayed, and the second information is the first stop identification information or Information indicating that the special game is being executed due to the second stop identification information being displayed in a stopped state and the special game resulting from the third stop identification information being displayed in a stopped state in a long-term variable state It is configured to indicate any of the information that is being executed,
In the second information, the information indicating that the special game is being executed due to the third stop identification information being stopped and displayed in the case of a long-term change state is the first time before the unit game is executed in the special game. A series of periods from the production time through the state during the execution of the unit game to the variable prize opening closing period and the final production time after the execution of the unit game (for example, during this period, the above variable prize opening is opened. Although there is nothing, there can be mentioned a series of periods including a period provided as a production period, a so-called demo period before small hit execution + during small hit execution + so-called demo period after small hit execution) The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is continuously output over a period of time.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (11)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port) through which game balls can enter;
Predetermined winning ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second winning port) among the plurality of winning ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port). A win / fail judgment means (for example, a first main game win / fail lottery means MN11-A, a second main game pass / fail lottery means MN11-B) that executes a win / no-go judgment triggered by a game ball entering the main game start opening B10). When,
If the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determining means (for example, the first main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-A, second main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-B) is winning, a special game that executes a special game advantageous to the player Game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko machine to the outside, the first information, the second information and the third information are configured to be output separately,
The first information is information indicating that there has been a single entry to any of the predetermined prize winning openings (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10), The second information is that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the plurality of winning holes (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the general winning port) reaches a predetermined number. The third information indicates that the illegal entry to any of the plurality of winning holes (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the general winning port) It is configured to include information that includes at least
The first information is output as a trigger when there is a single entry to the predetermined winning opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10). The second information includes a predetermined number of winning balls to be paid out based on a winning at the plurality of winning holes (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the general winning port). One information is output when the number is reached,
When outputting the one information, an output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and some kind of external output information (described above) One of the first information to the second information, for example, when outputting one information in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any one of the first information to the second information described above) For example, when it is during the output period of the first information output in the first information), the certain type of external output information (the first information to the second information described above) For example, after the output period of the first information output in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the second information described above, for example, the first information) It is configured to output one information in And when outputting one information in a certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the second information described above, for example, the first information), the certain type of external output Even if it is during the output period of one information in the external output information of a different type from the information (any one of the first information to the second information described above, for example, the second information), It is configured to output one information in the output information (the first information to the second information described above, for example, the first information),
When outputting the third information, there was an illegal entry to any of the plurality of winning holes (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the general winning port). It is configured to output continuously over a predetermined period triggered by this,
The output period of the one information when outputting the first information and the second information is the same period, while the output of the one information when outputting the first information and the second information A period different from the predetermined period when the third information is output, and the third information is longer than the output period of the one information when the first information and the second information are output. Is configured to be longer in the predetermined period when outputting
In the case where the condition for outputting the third information again is satisfied during the period in which the third information is continuously output over the predetermined period, the calculation starts from the time when the condition is satisfied, The pachinko gaming machine is configured to continuously output the third information over the predetermined period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (12)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
NG determination means (for example, first main game opt-out lottery means) that executes NG determination when a game ball enters a start port (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10). MN11-A, second main game winning / losing lottery means MN11-B),
If the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determining means (for example, the first main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-A, second main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-B) is winning, a special game that executes a special game advantageous to the player Game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko machine to the outside, the first information, the second information and the third information are configured to be output separately,
The first information is information that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) has reached a predetermined number, The second information is information that the number of game balls that have been paid out of the number of prize balls to be paid out has reached a predetermined number, and the third information is for identifying the type of pachinko gaming machine Information,
The first information is triggered by the fact that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) has reached a predetermined number. The second information is output as one information when the number of game balls that have been paid out of the number of prize balls to be paid out has reached a predetermined number,
When outputting the one information, an output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and some kind of external output information (described above) One of the first information to the second information, for example, when outputting one information in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any one of the first information to the second information described above) For example, when it is during the output period of the first information output in the first information), the certain type of external output information (the first information to the second information described above) For example, after the output period of the first information output in the first information), the certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the second information described above, for example, the first information) It is configured to output one information in And when outputting one information in a certain type of external output information (any of the first information to the second information described above, for example, the first information), the certain type of external output Even if it is during the output period of one information in the external output information of a different type from the information (any one of the first information to the second information described above, for example, the second information), It is configured to output one information in the output information (the first information to the second information described above, for example, the first information),
When outputting the third information, the information for identifying the type of the pachinko gaming machine includes a first identification signal that is a first byte number, a second identification signal that is a second byte number, and a third byte number. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it can be output in the order of the third identification signal, and is output in a signal format different from the signal format when outputting the one information.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (13)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port) through which game balls can enter;
A winning-port entrance detection unit (for example, detecting the entrance of a game ball into each winning port in the plurality of winning ports (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the general winning port) , First main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, general winning entrance entrance entrance detection device),
A winning port discharge detecting unit (for example, detecting discharge of game balls having entered each winning port in the plurality of winning ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port) , Total discharge confirmation sensor C90s),
Information initialization means (for example, main control board M) for initializing information temporarily stored in a predetermined temporary storage means,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, at least the first information is configured to be output,
The first information includes information indicating that there has been an illegal entry, information indicating that information temporarily stored in the predetermined temporary storage unit has been initialized, and the plurality of winning holes (for example, The first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, and the general winning opening) are configured to be information indicating any of the information indicating that there is an abnormal discharge of the game ball that has entered the ball. And
When the first information is output, an illegal entry to any of the plurality of winning holes (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the general winning port) is detected. One information is output when triggered by this, or one information is output triggered when the information temporarily stored in the predetermined temporary storage means is initialized, and the one information Is configured to output a predetermined signal over a predetermined period of time,
When the first information is output, there is an abnormal discharge of game balls that have entered the plurality of winning holes (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, or the general winning port). When detected, even if the predetermined signal over the predetermined period is output as the one information, the predetermined predetermined value is newly generated from the time when the discharge abnormality is detected. Until the information temporarily stored in the temporary storage means is initialized, the first information is continuously output, and the discharge abnormality is detected as a trigger. When the first information is continuously output, the first information is continuously output even if the one information should be newly output during the continuous output period. Configured to
As the external output information, second information different from the first information and the first information (for example, information to be output triggered by one ball entering the starting port, the number of prize balls to be paid out or paid out is predetermined) Information that is output when the number is reached, etc.), and an output period for outputting one information when outputting the second information, and the first information The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that an output period for outputting one piece of information when outputting is the same period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (14)
A payout means (for example, a prize ball payout unit KE10) capable of paying out a game ball by performing a payout operation;
A payout control means (for example, a prize ball payout control board KH) for controlling a payout operation of game balls by a payout means (for example, a prize ball payout unit KE10);
A pachinko gaming machine comprising a switch member operable by an operator (for example, an error release switch KH3a),
The payout control means (for example, a prize ball payout control board KH)
An error determination means (for example, error control means 3200) for determining whether or not an error relating to the game ball payout operation has occurred;
When the error determination unit (for example, the error control unit 3200) determines that an error has occurred, and when a predetermined release condition is satisfied, an error release unit (for example, cancels the error state) (for example, Error control means 3200),
The type of error includes at least a first type error, a second type error, and a third type error. In the first type error, the second type error, and the third type error, error determination means (for example, error The conditions for determining that an error has occurred by the control means 3200) are different,
When the error state is one of the first type error, the second type error, and the third type error, the payout operation by the payout means (for example, the prize ball payout unit KE10) is stopped. And
When the error state is related to the first type error, the error state related to the first type error can be released when the switch member (for example, the error release switch KH3a) is operated. And
In the case of an error state related to the second type error, a period during which the switch member (for example, the error release switch KH3a) is in an error state related to the second type error without being triggered is operated for a predetermined period. It is configured so that the error state related to the second type error can be canceled when triggered by
In the case of an error state related to the third type error, even if the switch member (for example, the error release switch KH3a) is operated, the error state related to the third type error cannot be released, and the The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the error state relating to the third type error cannot be canceled even during the period of the error state relating to the three type error.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (15)
An outer frame (for example, outer frame unit D12) which is a frame for fixing at a predetermined installation location;
An inner frame (e.g., front frame) that is aligned with an opening of an outer frame (e.g., outer frame unit D12) and is attached to the outer frame (e.g., outer frame unit D12) so as to be openable and closable. Frame unit D14),
A frame including a transparent plate (for example, transparent plate unit D16), and a frame with a transparent plate (for example, door unit D18) attached to the inner frame (for example, front frame unit D14) so as to be openable and closable. ,
Transparent frame-equipped frame detection unit (for example, door unit) for detecting whether or not the frame with a transparent plate (for example, door unit D18) is in an open state with respect to the inner frame (for example, front frame unit D14). Door opening sensor attached to D18),
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A sound output unit (for example, a speaker D24) capable of outputting sound;
A decorative lamp part (for example, frame decorative lamp D18-L) having a plurality of light sources provided at least on a frame with a transparent plate (for example, door unit D18);
A main control unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S) for controlling sound output to the sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) and light emission in the decorative lamp unit (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L);
The main control unit (for example, main control board M)
An identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game display unit A21g, based on the entrance of the game ball into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display part B21g),
When the identification information stopped and displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is in a predetermined mode, a special game advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
An error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means) for determining whether or not the open state is based on a detection state of a frame-opening detection unit with a transparent plate (for example, a door opening sensor attached to the door unit D18). ME), and the error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) determines whether the error state is the open state or the error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) Regardless of whether it is a non-error state that is determined not to be in the open state, it is configured to be able to execute the change display and stop display of the identification information,
The sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S)
During a period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit (for example, the speaker D24) and the decoration lamp unit (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) is caused to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode. When the error state becomes the non-error state, the light emission based on the predetermined light emission mode is ended after the output of the predetermined sound is ended,
The period from when the error state becomes the non-error state to when the output of the predetermined sound ends may be within the shortest period that the variable information display period can take, while the error state is the non-error state. The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the period from when the light emission based on the predetermined light emission mode ends to when the variation display period of the identification information exceeds the shortest possible period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (16)
A main game start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A member attached to the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that is displaced between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the second main game start port B10) or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) ) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured so that the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A sound output unit (for example, a speaker D24) capable of outputting sound;
A decorative lamp unit (for example, a decorative LED of the sub input button SB) having a plurality of light sources provided at a position visible to the player;
A video display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying video;
A main control unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
Controls sound output to a sound output unit (for example, speaker D24), light emission in a decoration lamp unit (for example, decoration LED of sub input button SB), and video display on a video display unit (for example, effect display device SG). A sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S)
The main control unit (for example, main control board M)
Based on the game ball entering the main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10), the main game is advanced, and the result of progressing the main game is a predetermined result. If so, main game control means (for example, game progress means MP) for controlling to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the auxiliary game is advanced based on the entrance of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10), and the result of the progress of the auxiliary game is the specific result, the variable member (for example, Auxiliary game control means (for example, game progress means MP) for controlling the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) to be in an open state;
The displacement state of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) and the state of entering the main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) An error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the
When the error determination unit (for example, the fraud detection information management unit ME) determines that an error has occurred, the error cancellation unit cancels the error state when a predetermined error cancellation condition is satisfied. (For example, fraud detection information management means ME), regardless of whether it is in the error state, it is configured to allow the progress of the main game and the progress of the auxiliary game,
The sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S)
Effect video display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20) for controlling the image display unit (for example, effect display device SG) to display the effect video according to the progress of the main game;
Effect lamp light emission control means (for example, effect display control means SM20) for controlling the decoration lamp portion (for example, the decoration LED of the sub input button SB) to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode corresponding to the display content of the effect image; With
During the period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from a sound output unit (for example, the speaker D24), and a decorative lamp unit (for example, a sub input button) is selected based on a specific light emission mode different from the predetermined light emission mode. SB decoration LED) is configured to emit light,
Even if the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied, the output is terminated after the predetermined sound is output for a predetermined period, and the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied. The light emission is terminated after the decoration lamp portion (for example, the decoration LED of the sub input button SB) emits light based on the specific light emission mode for a longer period than the predetermined period. It is a pachinko gaming machine that features it.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (17)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
Displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and at least two variable winning holes (for example, a first big prize opening C10, a second big prize winning) arranged at different positions on the gaming area (for example, gaming area D30) Mouth C20)
A sound output unit (for example, a speaker D24) capable of outputting sound;
A decorative lamp portion (for example, a frame decorative lamp D18-L) having a plurality of light sources provided at a position visible to the player;
A main control unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls sound output to the sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) and light emission in the decorative lamp unit (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L),
The main control unit (for example, main control board M)
When the game is advanced based on the game ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10), and the result of the progress of the game is a predetermined result, A special game in which one of the two variable prize winning openings (for example, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) is advantageous to the player is advanced (for example, the first big prize opening C10 and Game control means (for example, game progress means MP) for controlling the second big prize opening C20 to be released under the same conditions that the maximum opening period = 30 seconds, the maximum count number = 10, and the number of prize balls = 15. When,
The displacement state of the two variable prize winning ports (for example, the first grand prize winning port C10, the second grand prize winning port C20) and the two variable prize winning ports (for example, the first grand prize winning port C10, the second grand prize winning port C20). An error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the state of entering the ball is satisfied;
When the error determination unit (for example, the fraud detection information management unit ME) determines that an error has occurred, the error cancellation unit cancels the error state when a predetermined error cancellation condition is satisfied. (For example, fraud detection information management means ME), and is configured to allow the special game to proceed regardless of whether or not the error state occurs. The two variable prize openings (for example, the first prize winning opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) until the predetermined number of balls or a predetermined period of time elapses. It is a special game in which a unit game can be executed a plurality of times, and a unit game is executed a predetermined number of times, in which one of the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) is advantageous to the player. A special game in which the first special game and the unit game are executed a predetermined number of times, and the first special game is an opening mode of the two variable winning ports (for example, the first big winning port C10 and the second big winning port C20). (For example, the maximum opening period is the same as 30 seconds, but the pattern that keeps opening or the pattern that repeats opening and closing) or the above two variable winning holes to be opened (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize winning) The mouth C20) is configured to be capable of executing any one of the second special games of which at least one of the types is different, and a threshold value related to the number of entered balls during the special game under a certain type of error determination condition (for example, as described above) (When the error determination condition is whether or not the total number of balls entered during the execution period of the special game described above reaches the upper limit value instead of every unit game, the upper limit value becomes a threshold value) The first special Game and different is composed of a second special game,
The sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S)
During a period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit (for example, the speaker D24) and the decoration lamp unit (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) is caused to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode. Configured,
Even if the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied, the output is terminated after the predetermined sound is output for a predetermined period, and the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied. In addition, after the decorative lamp portion (for example, the frame decorative lamp D18-L) emits light based on the predetermined light emission mode for a longer period than the predetermined period, the light emission is terminated. It is a pachinko game machine.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (18)
An outer frame (for example, outer frame unit D12) which is a frame for fixing at a predetermined installation location;
An inner frame (e.g., front frame) that is aligned with an opening of an outer frame (e.g., outer frame unit D12) and is attached to the outer frame (e.g., outer frame unit D12) so as to be openable and closable. Frame unit D14),
A frame including a transparent plate (for example, transparent plate unit D16), and a frame with a transparent plate (for example, door unit D18) attached to the inner frame (for example, front frame unit D14) so as to be openable and closable. ,
Transparent frame-equipped frame detection unit (for example, door unit) for detecting whether or not the frame with a transparent plate (for example, door unit D18) is in an open state with respect to the inner frame (for example, front frame unit D14). Door opening sensor attached to D18),
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A sound output unit (for example, a speaker D24) capable of outputting sound;
A decorative lamp part (for example, frame decorative lamp D18-L) having a plurality of light sources provided at least on a frame with a transparent plate (for example, door unit D18);
A first effect displacement member (for example, an effect opening / closing accessory D18-Y) provided on a frame with a transparent plate (eg, door unit D18) and displaceable from a predetermined initial position;
A second effect displacement member (for example, the display area of the effect display device SG) that is provided on the game board attached to the inner frame (for example, the front frame unit D14) and is displaceable from a specific initial position. A member that can be displaced between a position to be shielded and a position that is not shielded, which corresponds to a so-called movable member for production).
A main control unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
Sound output to sound output unit (for example, speaker D24), light emission in decorative lamp unit (for example, frame decorative lamp D18-L), and first effect displacement member (for example, effect opening / closing accessory D18-Y) And a second effect displacement member (for example, a member displaceable between a position where the display area of the effect display device SG is shielded and a position where it is not shielded, which corresponds to a so-called effectable movable member). A sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S) for controlling,
The main control unit (for example, main control board M)
Game control means (for example, game progress means MP) for advancing the game based on the entrance of game balls into the start openings (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
Error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means) for determining whether or not the open state is based on a detection state in a frame-opening detection unit with a transparent plate (for example, a door opening sensor attached to the door unit D18) ME), and the error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) determines whether the error state is the open state or the error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) Regardless of whether it is a non-error state determined not to be in an open state, it is configured to allow the game to proceed,
During a period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit (for example, the speaker D24) and the decoration lamp unit (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) is caused to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode. When the error state becomes the non-error state, the light emission based on the predetermined light emission mode is ended after the output of the predetermined sound is ended, And even if the error state is not the non-error state, the output is terminated after outputting the predetermined sound over a predetermined period,
When the non-error state becomes the error state, if the first effect displacement member (for example, the effect opening / closing accessory D18-Y) is not present at the predetermined initial position, When the non-error state becomes the error state while the displacement member (for example, the opening / closing accessory D18-Y for production) is displaced to the predetermined initial position, the second displacement member (for example, This is a case where a member that is displaceable between a position that shields the display area of the effect display device SG and a position that is not shielded, corresponding to a so-called effectable movable member) does not exist at the specific initial position. The second effect displacement member (for example, a member that can be displaced between a position that shields the display area of the effect display device SG and a position that is not shielded, and corresponds to a so-called effectable movable member) is specified as described above. initial It is pachinko machines, characterized in being configured so as not to displace the location.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (19)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
A sound output unit (for example, a speaker D24) capable of outputting sound;
A decorative lamp portion (for example, a frame decorative lamp D18-L) having a plurality of light sources provided at a position visible to the player;
A main control unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls sound output to the sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) and light emission in the decorative lamp unit (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L),
The main control unit (for example, main control board M)
When the game is advanced based on the game ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10), and the result of the progress of the game is a predetermined result, Game control means (for example, game progress means MP) for controlling a special game to make the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
Displacement state of the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) and the state of entering the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) When an error determination condition based on the above is satisfied, an error determination unit (for example, fraud detection information management unit ME) that determines that an error has occurred;
When the error determination unit (for example, the fraud detection information management unit ME) determines that an error has occurred, the error cancellation unit cancels the error state when a predetermined error cancellation condition is satisfied. (For example, fraud detection information management means ME),
The sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A first error notification mode in which a predetermined sound is output from a sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) and an error notification is performed by causing a decorative lamp unit (for example, frame decorative lamp D18-L) to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode. Then, the predetermined sound is not output from the sound output unit (for example, the speaker D24), while the decorative lamp unit (for example, the frame decorative lamp D18-L) is caused to emit light based on the predetermined light emission mode. A second error notification mode, and during the period of the error state, it is possible to execute either the first error notification mode or the second error notification mode,
A first type error determination condition that is an error determination condition that is satisfied when the first error notification mode is executed and a second type error determination condition that is an error determination condition that is satisfied when the second error notification mode is executed; When the first error notification mode is executed, after the error notification is performed for a predetermined period, the error notification is terminated while the second error notification mode is executed. In such a case, the error notification is configured to be terminated after performing the error notification over a specific period different from the predetermined period,
The second error notification mode is executed after the second type error determination condition is satisfied and until the first type error determination condition is satisfied, and the first type error determination is performed during the execution of the second error notification mode. When the condition is satisfied, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to newly execute the first error notification mode.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (5-1)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as a first hold until the first success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied;
If the first success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied,
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information is controlled so as to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit. Display control means;
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as a second hold until the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied;
If the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied, second success / failure determination means for performing the determination of the success / failure based on the second random number;
A second identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means;
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information is controlled to stop and display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit. Display control means;
If the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the first identification information stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, or the second determination of success / failure When the result of the determination of success / failure by the means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening A special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times to make the variable prize opening advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined period or until a predetermined period elapses;
A game state transition control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and that can be controlled to enter the specific game state after the execution of the special game. In the case where the second hold is present, the first success / failure determination permission condition is not satisfied, while the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the first hold is present. In addition, the benefit given to the player when the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is a winner than when the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is a winner. Configured to be relatively high,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is information that is output in response to the execution of a special game, and is configured to be information that is output until the special game ends.
The first information is output over a first period when a special game is executed in a normal gaming state, and over a second period when a special game is executed in a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the second period is configured to be shorter than the first period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (5-2)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as a first hold until the first success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied;
If the first success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied,
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information is controlled so as to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit. Display control means;
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as a second hold until the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied;
If the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied, second success / failure determination means for performing the determination of the success / failure based on the second random number;
A second identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means;
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information is controlled to stop and display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit. Display control means;
If the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the first identification information stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, or the second determination of success / failure When the result of the determination of success / failure by the means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening A special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times to make the variable prize opening advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined period or until a predetermined period elapses;
A game state transition control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and that can be controlled to enter the specific game state after the execution of the special game. In the case where the second hold is present, the first success / failure determination permission condition is not satisfied, while the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the first hold is present. In addition, the benefit given to the player when the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is a winner than when the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is a winner. Configured to be relatively high,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is information that is output in response to the execution of a special game, and is configured to be information that is output until the special game ends.
The execution period of the special game includes a start demo period that is a waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and an end of execution of the unit game that is the last time from the start of execution of the first unit game. A unit game execution period until the end, and an end demo period that is a waiting period from the end of execution of the last unit game to the end of execution of the special game,
The first information is continuously output over a start demo period, a unit game execution period, and an end demo period,
When the special game is executed in the normal gaming state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demo period is configured to be the first period,
When the special game is executed in the specific game state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demo period is configured to be the second period,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the second period is shorter than the first period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (8-1)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the validity determination means for executing the validity determination;
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the determination of correctness by the correctness determination means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section,
If the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display section is the specific stop identification information, there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning award Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times so that the variable prize opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined period elapses;
A game state transition control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the starting port than the normal game state, and that can be controlled to be in the specific game state after completion of execution of the special game,
As external output information to output from pachinko gaming machine to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information and the second information separately,
The first information is information that is output in response to the execution of a special game, and is configured to be information that is output until the special game ends.
The first information is output over a first period when a special game is executed in a normal gaming state, and over a second period when a special game is executed in a specific gaming state. The second period is configured to be shorter than the first period,
When the special game is executed in the specific game state and the specific game state is set again after the execution of the special game, the second information includes the specific game state before the execution of the special game, the execution of the special game, and the A pachinko gaming machine configured to be continuously output over a specific gaming state after completion of execution of a special game.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (8-2)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the validity determination means for executing the validity determination;
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the determination of correctness by the correctness determination means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section,
If the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display section is the specific stop identification information, there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning award Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times so that the variable prize opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined period elapses;
A game state transition control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the starting port than the normal game state, and that can be controlled to be in the specific game state after completion of execution of the special game,
As external output information to output from pachinko gaming machine to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information and the second information separately,
The first information is information that is output in response to the execution of a special game, and is configured to be information that is output until the special game ends.
The execution period of the special game includes a start demo period that is a waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and an end of execution of the unit game that is the last time from the start of execution of the first unit game. A unit game execution period until the end, and an end demo period that is a waiting period from the end of execution of the last unit game to the end of execution of the special game,
The first information is continuously output over a start demo period, a unit game execution period, and an end demo period,
When the special game is executed in the normal gaming state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demo period is configured to be the first period,
When the special game is executed in the specific game state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demo period is configured to be the second period,
The second period is configured to be shorter than the first period;
When the special game is executed in the specific game state and the specific game state is set again after the execution of the special game, the second information includes the specific game state before the execution of the special game, the execution of the special game, and the A pachinko gaming machine configured to be continuously output over a specific gaming state after completion of execution of a special game.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (9-1)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number triggered by a game ball entering the starting port,
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the validity determination means for executing the validity determination;
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of identification information, based on the result of the determination by the determination unit.
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section,
A special gaming state transition control means for transitioning the variable prize opening to a special gaming state that can be in an advantageous state for the player after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed by the specific stop identification information or the special stop identification information;
When the special stop identification information is stopped and displayed and the game is shifted to the special game state, there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening or the variable winning opening is played until a predetermined period elapses. If a special game in which a unit game that is advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times can be executed and the game is shifted to the special game state because the special stop identification information is stopped and displayed, a variable prize is awarded. A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed once in which a variable prize opening is in an advantageous state for the player until there is a predetermined number of balls in the mouth or a predetermined period of time elapses;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game Lottery state control means for controlling so that it can be a high probability lottery state in
As the gaming state related to the variable information display period of the identification information, there are a normal variable state and a short time variable state in which the variable information display period of the identification information is relatively shortened compared to the normal variable state. A variable state control means for controlling the state to be in a variable state, and before and after the execution of the special game due to the specific stop identification information being stopped and displayed, the gaming state according to the high probability lottery state and the low probability lottery state While at least one of the normal fluctuation state and the gaming state related to the short-time fluctuation state can change, the high probability lottery state and the low state are not obtained before and after the execution of the special game due to the special stop identification information being stopped and displayed. The gaming state related to the probability lottery state and the gaming state related to the normal variation state and the short-time variation state are configured not to change,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is configured to be information indicating a period until the variation display of the identification information becomes possible after the execution of the special game due to the special stop identification information being stopped and displayed.
The first information is output over a first period when the special game is in a normally fluctuating state at the start of execution of the special game due to the special stop identification information being stopped and displayed. When the execution of the special game due to the stop display is started, it is configured to be output over the second period when it is in the short-time fluctuation state, and the second period is the first period. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be shorter than the period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (9-2)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number triggered by a game ball entering the first start opening,
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first success / failure determination means for performing the determination of success / failure;
First identification information display content determination means for determining first stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of the first identification information, based on the result of the determination by the first success / failure determination means;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit. Means,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number triggered by a game ball entering the second starting port;
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquiring means, second correctness determination means for executing the correctness determination;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining second stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of the second identification information, based on the result of the determination by the second determination means;
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit. Means,
After the first stop identification information or the second stop identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode, the special game state transition control means for shifting the variable winning opening to a special game state that can be in an advantageous state for the player. When,
When the specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed as the predetermined stop display mode, when there is a transition to the special gaming state, there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening or the first period is It is possible to execute a special game in which the first unit game that makes the variable winning opening advantageous to the player until the time has elapsed, and the special stop identification information is stopped and displayed as the predetermined stop display mode. When the game state is shifted to the special game state due to the game, the variable prize opening is advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined number of balls in the variable prize opening or the second period shorter than the first period elapses. Special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing the second unit game once to be
As a gaming state related to the variable display period of the first identification information or the second identification information, the normal fluctuation state and the short-time fluctuation in which the variable display period of the first identification information or the second identification information is relatively shortened compared to the normal fluctuation state. Before and after the execution of the special game due to the fact that the specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed. While the gaming state related to the normal variation state and the short variation state can change, the gaming state related to the normal variation state and the short variation state before and after the execution of the special game due to the special stop identification information being stopped and displayed. Is configured not to change,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is information that is output when the special stop identification information is stopped and displayed, and is after the execution end timing of the special game due to the special stop identification information being stopped and displayed. It is configured to be information that is output until a predetermined timing, which is the timing,
The first information is output over a first period when the special game is in a normally fluctuating state at the start of execution of the special game due to the special stop identification information being stopped and displayed. When the execution of the special game due to the stop display is started, it is configured to be output over the second period when it is in the short-time fluctuation state, and the second period is the first period. Configured to be shorter than the period,
When the specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed as the second stop identification information, the profit rate attached to the player is relatively higher than when the specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed as the first stop identification information. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be high.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (16-1)
A main game start port where game balls can enter,
Auxiliary gaming start opening where game balls can enter,
A member that is attached to the main game start opening and is displaced between an open state and a closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the main game start opening or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy to enter and is configured so that when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter in the start opening for the main game,
A sound output unit capable of outputting sound;
A decorative lamp portion having a plurality of light sources provided at positions visible to the player;
A video display unit capable of displaying video;
A main control unit for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit for controlling sound output to the sound output unit, light emission in the decorative lamp unit, and video display on the video display unit,
The main control unit
It is advantageous for a player when the main game identification information is variably displayed based on the game ball entering the main game start opening and the main game is advanced, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. Main game control means for controlling to execute a special game;
When the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed based on the game ball entering the auxiliary game start opening, the auxiliary game is advanced, and when the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable member is released. Auxiliary game control means for controlling to be in a state;
An error determination means for determining that an error has occurred if any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member and the state of entering the main game start opening is satisfied;
In the error state where it is determined that an error has occurred by the error determination means, and when a predetermined error release condition is satisfied, an error release means for releasing the error state is provided, and whether the error state is present. Regardless of whether it is configured to allow the progress of the main game and the progress of the auxiliary game,
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the operation of changing the variable member from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable member within the open drive period during which the variable member can be in the open state is performed. It is configured to execute an easy-to-play game that can be executed multiple times,
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are included,
The first condition is that the start gate for the main game is within the period of the entrance valid period, which is a period during which the entrance to the start port for the main game is regarded as normal when the easy entry game is executed once. Satisfied by having more than the first number of balls,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied when the number of balls entered into the main game starting port is equal to or greater than the second number outside the period of validity of the ball entry,
Even if the first condition is satisfied and an error state occurs, even if the second condition is satisfied and the error state occurs, the main game When the number of balls entering the starting port exceeds the third number, it is configured to be in an error state again.
The first number is greater than the second number and the second number is greater than the third number;
The sub-control unit
In accordance with the progress of the main game, effect video display control means for controlling to be able to display the effect video in the video display unit,
An effect lamp light emission control means for controlling the decorative lamp unit to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode corresponding to the display content of the effect image;
During the period of the error state, the decorative lamp unit is configured to emit a predetermined sound based on a specific light emission mode different from the predetermined light emission mode and output a predetermined sound from the sound output unit,
Even if the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied, the output is terminated after the predetermined sound is output for a predetermined period, and the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to end the light emission after the decorative lamp unit emits light based on the specific light emission mode for a longer period than the predetermined period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (16-2)
A main game start port where game balls can enter,
Auxiliary gaming start opening where game balls can enter,
A main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the main game identification information;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information;
A member that is attached to the main game start opening and is displaced between an open state and a closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the main game start opening or is compared with the closed state. It is easy to enter, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the main game starting port is provided with a variable member configured so that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter compared to the open state,
It is advantageous for a player when the main game identification information is variably displayed based on the game ball entering the main game start opening and the main game is advanced, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. Main game control means for controlling to execute a special game;
When the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed based on the game ball entering the auxiliary game start opening, the auxiliary game is advanced, and when the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable member is released. Auxiliary game control means for controlling to be in a state;
An error determination means for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member and the state of entering the main game start opening is satisfied;
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the operation of changing the variable member from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable member within the open drive period during which the variable member can be in the open state is performed. It is configured to execute an easy-to-play game that can be executed multiple times,
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are included,
The first condition is that the start gate for the main game is within the period of the entrance valid period, which is a period during which the entrance to the start port for the main game is regarded as normal when the easy entry game is executed once. Satisfied by entering the first number of balls,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied by the second number of balls entering the start gate for the main game outside the period for which the ball is valid,
Even if it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, even if it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, it is determined that an error has occurred. After that, it is configured to determine that an error has occurred again due to the third number of balls entering the main game start port,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the first number is larger than the second number and the second number is larger than the third number.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (17-1)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information;
A variable winning opening that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
A sound output unit capable of outputting sound;
A decorative lamp portion having a plurality of light sources provided at positions visible to the player;
A main control unit for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit for controlling sound output to the sound output unit and light emission in the decorative lamp unit,
The main control unit
A special game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous for the player when the game is advanced by displaying the identification information variably based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. Game control means for controlling to advance,
An error determination means for determining that an error has occurred, when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the status of entering the variable prize opening is satisfied;
In the error state where it is determined that an error has occurred by the error determination means, and when a predetermined error release condition is satisfied, an error release means for releasing the error state is provided, and whether the error state is present. Regardless of whether or not the special game can be progressed, and when the special game is advanced, the unit game that makes the variable winning opening advantageous to the player can be executed a plurality of times. The first special game that is a special game that executes a unit game a predetermined number of times, and the second special game that is a special game that executes a unit game a predetermined number of times and has a variable winning opening opening mode different from the first special game Is configured to be executable,
As the kind of the predetermined mode, it has at least a first predetermined mode corresponding to the execution of the first special game and a second predetermined mode corresponding to the execution of the second special game,
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are included,
The first condition is that, when a special game is executed once, entering a variable prize opening is within a period of a valid entry period, which is a period during which the entry to the variable prize opening is considered normal. Satisfying by becoming more than one,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied when the number of balls entered into the variable prize opening is equal to or more than the second number outside the period of the pitch valid period,
Even if the first condition is satisfied and an error state occurs, even if the second condition is satisfied and the error state occurs, the variable prize opening is changed after the error state is reached. It is configured to be in an error state again when the number of balls entering the ball exceeds the third number.
The first number is greater than the second number and the second number is greater than the third number;
The first number is determined when the first predetermined mode is stopped and the first special game is executed, and when the second predetermined mode is stopped and the second special game is executed. The value set as the first condition is configured differently,
The sub-control unit
During the period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit and the decorative lamp unit is configured to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode.
Even if the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied, the output is terminated after the predetermined sound is output for a predetermined period, and the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to end the light emission after the decorative lamp portion emits light based on the predetermined light emission mode for a longer period than the predetermined period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (17-2)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information;
With a variable winning opening that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state,
A special game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous for the player when the game is advanced by displaying the identification information variably based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. Game control means for controlling to advance,
When satisfying any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the status of entering the variable winning opening, an error determination means for determining that an error has occurred is provided. A unit game that can be executed a plurality of times in a state in which the mouth is advantageous for the player, a first game that is a special game that executes the unit game a predetermined number of times, and a special game that executes the unit game a predetermined number of times. One special game is configured to be able to execute one of the second special games in which the variable winning opening is different.
As the kind of the predetermined mode, it has at least a first predetermined mode corresponding to the execution of the first special game and a second predetermined mode corresponding to the execution of the second special game,
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are included,
The first condition is that, when a special game is executed once, entering a variable prize opening is within a period of a valid entry period, which is a period during which the entry to the variable prize opening is considered normal. Satisfying by becoming one,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied by the second number of balls entering the variable winning opening outside the period for which the ball is valid.
Even if it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, even if it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, it is determined that an error has occurred. After that, it is configured to determine that an error has occurred again due to the third number of balls entering the variable prize opening,
The first number is greater than the second number and the second number is greater than the third number;
The first number is determined when the first predetermined mode is stopped and the first special game is executed, and when the second predetermined mode is stopped and the second special game is executed. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the value set as the first condition is different.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (18-1)
An outer frame that is a frame for fixing at a predetermined installation location;
An inner frame body that is aligned with the opening of the outer frame body and is attached to the outer frame body so as to be openable and closable;
A frame including a transparent plate, attached to the inner frame so as to be openable and closable, and a frame with a transparent plate;
A transparent plate-attached frame opening detection unit for detecting whether or not the transparent plate-attached frame is in an open state with respect to the inner frame,
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A sound output unit capable of outputting sound;
A decorative lamp portion having a plurality of light sources provided at least on the frame with a transparent plate;
A first effect displacement member provided on the transparent plate-equipped frame and displaceable from a predetermined initial position;
A second effect displacement member provided on a game board attached to the inner frame, and displaceable from a specific initial position;
A main control unit for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit that controls sound output to the sound output unit, light emission in the decorative lamp unit, and displacement drive of the first effect displacement member and the second effect displacement member;
The main control unit
Game control means for advancing the game based on the game ball entering the start opening,
Whether or not the error state is determined to be in the open state by an error determination unit, based on a detection state in the transparent plate-equipped frame opening detection unit. The game is configured to be able to proceed regardless of whether it is a non-error state that is determined not to be in the open state by the error determination means,
During the period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit and the decorative lamp unit is configured to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode, and the error state becomes the non-error state. In this case, after the output of the predetermined sound is finished, the light emission based on the predetermined light emission mode is ended, and the error state does not become the non-error state. After outputting the predetermined sound over a period of time, the output is configured to end,
When the non-error state becomes the error state and the first effect displacement member is not present at the predetermined initial position, the first effect displacement member is displaced to the predetermined initial position. On the other hand, when the non-error state becomes the error state, even if the second effect displacement member is not present at the specific initial position, the second effect displacement member is It is configured not to be displaced to the initial position,
The decorative lamp part and the first effect displacement member are arranged adjacent to each other,
When the first effect displacement member does not exist at the predetermined initial position, the first effect displacement member emits light in a specific light emission mode, while the first effect displacement member has the non-error state changed to the error state. When it becomes the situation that exists in the predetermined initial position from the situation that does not exist in the predetermined initial position, it is configured not to emit light in the specific light emission mode,
When the non-error state becomes the error state, the first effect displacement member is displaced to the predetermined initial position, and the decoration lamp portion is configured to emit light based on the predetermined light emission mode. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by that.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (18-2)
A main game start port where game balls can enter,
Auxiliary gaming start opening where game balls can enter,
A main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the main game identification information;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information;
A member that is attached to the main game start opening and is displaced between an open state and a closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the main game start opening or is compared with the closed state. It is easy to enter, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the main game starting port is provided with a variable member configured so that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter compared to the open state,
It is advantageous for a player when the main game identification information is variably displayed based on the game ball entering the main game start opening and the main game is advanced, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. Main game control means for controlling to execute a special game;
When the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed based on the game ball entering the auxiliary game start opening, the auxiliary game is advanced, and when the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable member is released. Auxiliary game control means for controlling to be in a state;
An error determination means for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member and the state of entering the main game start opening is satisfied;
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the operation of changing the variable member from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable member within the open drive period during which the variable member can be in the open state is performed. It is configured to execute an easy-to-play game that can be executed multiple times,
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are included,
The first condition is that the start gate for the main game is outside the entrance valid period, which is a period during which the entrance to the start port for the main game is regarded as normal when the easy entry game is executed once. Satisfied by entering the first number of balls,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied by the second number of balls entering the start gate for the main game outside the period for which the ball is valid,
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, an error is generated by satisfying the second condition while performing error notification for a predetermined period by a predetermined error notification unit. When it is determined that the error has occurred, the error notification unit is configured to perform error notification over a specific period different from the predetermined period,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first number is configured to be greater than the second number, and the predetermined period is configured to be longer than the specific period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (19-1)
A main game start port where game balls can enter,
Auxiliary gaming start opening where game balls can enter,
A main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the main game identification information;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information;
A member that is attached to the main game start opening and is displaced between an open state and a closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the main game start opening or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy to enter and is configured so that when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter in the start opening for the main game,
A sound output unit capable of outputting sound;
A decorative lamp portion having a plurality of light sources provided at positions visible to the player;
A main control unit for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit for controlling sound output to the sound output unit and light emission in the decorative lamp unit,
The main control unit
It is advantageous for a player when the main game identification information is variably displayed based on the game ball entering the main game start opening and the main game is advanced, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. Main game control means for controlling to execute a special game;
When the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed based on the game ball entering the auxiliary game start opening, the auxiliary game is advanced, and when the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable member is released. Auxiliary game control means for controlling to be in a state;
An error determination means for determining that an error has occurred if any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member and the state of entering the main game start opening is satisfied;
In the case of an error state in which it is determined that an error has occurred by the error determination means, and when a predetermined error release condition is satisfied, an error release means for releasing the error state is provided,
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the operation of changing the variable member from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable member within the open drive period during which the variable member can be in the open state is performed. It is configured to execute an easy-to-play game that can be executed multiple times,
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are included,
The first condition is that the start gate for the main game is outside the entrance valid period, which is a period during which the entrance to the start port for the main game is regarded as normal when the easy entry game is executed once. Satisfied by having more than the first number of balls,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied when the number of balls entered into the main game starting port is equal to or greater than the second number outside the period of validity of the ball entry,
The sub-control unit
A first error notification mode in which a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit and the decorative lamp unit is caused to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode, and the predetermined sound is not output from the sound output unit. A second error notification mode that performs error notification by causing the decorative lamp unit to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode, and during the period of the error state, the first error notification mode and the second error notification mode Can be performed and
When the first condition is satisfied and an error state occurs, the first error notification mode is executed. On the other hand, when the second condition is satisfied and the error state occurs, the second error notification mode is executed. When the first error notification mode is executed and the error notification is performed for a predetermined period, the error notification is terminated while the second error notification mode is executed. In this case, the error notification is configured to be terminated after performing the error notification over a specific period different from the predetermined period,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first number is configured to be greater than the second number, and the predetermined period is configured to be longer than the specific period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (19-2)
A main game start port where game balls can enter,
Auxiliary gaming start opening where game balls can enter,
A main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the main game identification information;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information;
A member that is attached to the main game start opening and is displaced between an open state and a closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the main game start opening or is compared with the closed state. It is easy to enter, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the main game starting port is provided with a variable member configured so that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter compared to the open state,
It is advantageous for a player when the main game identification information is variably displayed based on the game ball entering the main game start opening and the main game is advanced, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. Main game control means for controlling to execute a special game;
When the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed based on the game ball entering the auxiliary game start opening, the auxiliary game is advanced, and when the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable member is released. Auxiliary game control means for controlling to be in a state;
An error determination means for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member and the state of entering the main game start opening is satisfied;
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the operation of changing the variable member from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable member within the open drive period during which the variable member can be in the open state is performed. It is configured to execute an easy-to-play game that can be executed multiple times,
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are included,
The first condition is that the start gate for the main game is outside the entrance valid period, which is a period during which the entrance to the start port for the main game is regarded as normal when the easy entry game is executed once. Satisfied by entering the first number of balls,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied by the second number of balls entering the start gate for the main game outside the period for which the ball is valid,
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, an error is notified by a predetermined sound, while when it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, It is configured not to perform error notification with a predetermined sound,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first number is configured to be larger than the second number.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (A1)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display section (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11 for controlling to stop display after the identification information is variably displayed on the symbol display part A21g and the second main game symbol display part B21g). -C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) advantageous to the player. Executable special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30);
A gaming state control means for controlling to change from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, having a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the starting port than the normal gaming state. For example, specific game control means MP50),
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is configured to be output when the identification information is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed.
In the normal gaming state, when the identification information is variably displayed and then stopped, the period during which the first information is output is configured to be the first period,
In the specific gaming state, when the identification information is variably displayed and then stopped, the period during which the first information is output is configured to be the second period,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the second period is configured to be relatively shorter than the first period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (A2)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a so-called attacker) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a so-called V zone) in which a game ball that has entered a variable prize opening (for example, a so-called attacker) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display after the first identification information is variably displayed;
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a first special game that can be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group; ,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), in the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the second identification information;
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the variable prize opening opening game for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, so-called attacker) from the closed state to the open state. Control means (for example, control means for executing a so-called small hit game);
When a variable winning opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area, second special game control means for executing a second special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, at the time of a small hit game) Control means to execute a so-called jackpot game triggered by entering the V zone),
There is a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port (for example, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state Game state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling to be in a specific game state,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is configured to be output when the first identification information or the second identification information is variably displayed and displayed after being stopped.
A plurality of types of output periods of the first information are provided, and the second identification information is variably displayed in the specific gaming state and then output when triggered by the stop display in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the output period of the first information is the shortest output period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (A3)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display section (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11 for controlling to stop display after the identification information is variably displayed on the symbol display part A21g and the second main game symbol display part B21g). -C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, or after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10) And a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the second grand prize opening C20) in an advantageous state for the player,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is information that is output in response to the execution of a special game, and is configured to be information that is output until the special game ends.
At the time of execution of a special game resulting from the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the first timing is triggered by the fact that the first timing is reached after the identification information is stopped and displayed. Configured to start the output of a single information,
At the time of execution of a special game resulting from the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the second timing is reached after the identification information is stopped and displayed. Configured to start the output of a single information,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first timing and the second timing are different.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (A4)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display after the first identification information is variably displayed;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), in the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the second identification information;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a predetermined number of variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) First, a unit game is executed a plurality of times so that a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be made advantageous to the player until there is a ball or a predetermined period elapses. The special game can be executed, and after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize winning, etc.) Units that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined number of balls in the mouth C20) or until a specific period elapses. Second special game that executes a game once And special game controller that can execute (e.g., control means for performing a so-called jackpot gaming, control means for performing a so-called Koatari game),
There is a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port (for example, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state Game state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling to be in a specific game state,
The probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is configured to be higher than the probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Or, the first identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second identification information is configured not to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is information that is output when the second special game is executed, and is configured to be information that is output until the second special game ends.
The execution period of the second special game includes a start demonstration period that is a standby period from the start of execution of the second special game to the start of execution of the unit game, and a unit game execution period from the start of execution of the unit game to the end of execution of the unit game. And an end demo period that is a waiting period from the end of execution of the unit game to the end of execution of the second special game,
The first information is continuously output over a start demo period, a unit game execution period, and an end demo period,
When the second special game is executed when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the normal gaming state, a variable prize is awarded in the unit game in the second special game. When the unit game ends when the specific period has passed without entering the mouth (for example, the first grand prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20), the second special game The period during which the first information is output during the end demo period is configured to be the first period,
When the second special game is executed when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, a variable prize is awarded in the unit game in the second special game When the unit game ends when the specific period has passed without entering the mouth (for example, the first grand prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20), the second special game During the end demo period, the period during which the first information is output is configured to be the second period,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the second period is shorter than the first period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (A5)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display section (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11 for controlling to stop display after the identification information is variably displayed on the symbol display part A21g and the second main game symbol display part B21g). -C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning holes (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) or predetermined. Special game control capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times so that a variable winning slot (for example, the first big winning slot C10, the second big winning slot C20) can be made advantageous to the player until the period elapses. Means (for example, special game control means MP30);
The game state when the special game is not executed includes a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, the special game is executed, and the specific region (for example, the specific region C22) is entered. A game state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) for controlling the player to enter a specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed.
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is information that is output in response to the execution of a special game, and is configured to be information that is output until the special game ends.
The execution period of the special game includes a start demo period that is a waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and an end of execution of the unit game that is the last time from the start of execution of the first unit game. A unit game execution period until the end, and an end demo period that is a waiting period from the end of execution of the last unit game to the end of execution of the special game,
The first information is continuously output over a start demo period, a unit game execution period, and an end demo period,
If the gaming state before the execution of the special game is different from the gaming state after the execution of the special game, the period during which the first information is output during the end demo period in the special game is Configured to be the first period,
If the gaming state before the start of execution of the special game and the gaming state after the end of execution of the special game are not different, the period during which the first information is output during the end demonstration period in the special game is Configured to be the second period,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the second period and the first period are different.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (A6)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display section (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11 for controlling to stop display after the identification information is variably displayed on the symbol display part A21g and the second main game symbol display part B21g). -C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning holes (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) or predetermined. Special game control capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times so that a variable winning slot (for example, the first big winning slot C10, the second big winning slot C20) can be made advantageous to the player until the period elapses. Means (for example, special game control means MP30);
A gaming state that has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state as a gaming state when the special game is not executed, and is controlled so that it can be set to the specific gaming state after completion of the execution of the special game Control means (for example, specific game control means MP50),
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is information that is output in response to the execution of a special game, and is configured to be information that is output until the special game ends.
The execution period of the special game includes a start demo period that is a waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and an end of execution of the unit game that is the last time from the start of execution of the first unit game. A unit game execution period until the end, and an end demo period that is a waiting period from the end of execution of the last unit game to the end of execution of the special game,
The first information is continuously output over a start demo period, a unit game execution period, and an end demo period,
When the game state before the start of execution of a special game is a normal game state and the game state after the end of execution of a special game is a specific game state, the first game during the end demonstration period in the special game The period during which information is output is configured to be the first period,
When the game state before the start of execution of a special game is a normal game state and the game state after the end of execution of a special game is a normal game state, the first game during the end demonstration period in the special game The period during which information is output is configured to be the second period,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the second period is shorter than the first period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (A7)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display section (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11 for controlling to stop display after the identification information is variably displayed on the symbol display part A21g and the second main game symbol display part B21g). -C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning holes (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) or predetermined. Special game control capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times so that a variable winning slot (for example, the first big winning slot C10, the second big winning slot C20) can be made advantageous to the player until the period elapses. Means (for example, special game control means MP30);
A gaming state that has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state as a gaming state when the special game is not executed, and is controlled so that it can be set to the specific gaming state after completion of the execution of the special game Control means (for example, specific game control means MP50),
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is information that is output in response to the execution of a special game, and is configured to be information that is output until the special game ends.
The execution period of the special game includes a start demo period that is a waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and an end of execution of the unit game that is the last time from the start of execution of the first unit game. A unit game execution period until the end, and an end demo period that is a waiting period from the end of execution of the last unit game to the end of execution of the special game,
The first information is continuously output over a start demo period, a unit game execution period, and an end demo period,
When the game state before the start of execution of a special game is a normal game state and the game state after the end of execution of a special game is a specific game state, the first game during the end demonstration period in the special game The period during which information is output is configured to be the first period,
When the gaming state before the start of execution of a special game is a specific gaming state and the gaming state after the end of execution of a special game is a specific gaming state, the first game during the end demonstration period in the special game The period during which information is output is configured to be the second period,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the second period is shorter than the first period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (A8)
The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the result of the determination Based on the identification information display control unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the identification information display control means (for example, control to stop display after the identification information is variably displayed) , First and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning holes (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) or predetermined. Special game control capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times so that a variable winning slot (for example, the first big winning slot C10, the second big winning slot C20) can be made advantageous to the player until the period elapses. Means (for example, special game control means MP30);
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled to be in a high probability lottery state at
It has a non-entrance easy state and a non-entrance easy state, and an easy-entry state that makes it easier to enter a starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10). Game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled so as to enter the easy-to-enter state after completion of the game,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the first predetermined group of the predetermined group in the low probability lottery state and the non-entry easy state, the high probability lottery state and non- Easy to enter,
If the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the first predetermined group in the predetermined group in the high probability lottery state and the non-entry easy state, the high probability lottery state and It becomes a ball easy state,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The first information is information that is output in response to the execution of a special game, and is configured to be information that is output until the special game ends.
The execution period of the special game includes a start demo period that is a waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and an end of execution of the unit game that is the last time from the start of execution of the first unit game. A unit game execution period until the end, and an end demo period that is a waiting period from the end of execution of the last unit game to the end of execution of the special game,
The first information is continuously output over a start demo period, a unit game execution period, and an end demo period,
In the low probability lottery state and the non-entering easy state, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the first predetermined group of the predetermined group, the special game is executed, and after the execution of the special game is finished, In the probability lottery state and the non-entry easy state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demonstration period in the special game is configured to be the first period,
In the high probability lottery state and the non-entering easy state, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the first predetermined group among the predetermined groups, the special game is executed, and after the execution of the special game is finished, In the probability lottery state and the easy entry state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demonstration period in the special game is configured to be the second period,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the second period is longer than the first period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (AA1)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution execution) for acquiring a random number triggered by a game ball entering the start port (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10) Means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the validity determination means (for example, First main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-A, second main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-B),
Identification for determining stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of identification information, based on the result of the determination by the determination unit (for example, the first main game winning / not determining lottery unit MN11-A, the second main game winning / not determining lottery unit MN11-B) Information display content determination means (for example, first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, second main game symbol determination means MN41-B);
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the second main game symbol display unit B21g). MP11-C),
If the winning / non-winning determination result (e.g., the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is a win, the stop identification information is displayed after being stopped and displayed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that makes the winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. Lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling the player to enter a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game when a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered; ,
It is determined that an error has occurred when any one of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the situation of entering the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) is satisfied. Error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME),
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are included,
The first condition is that a larger number of game balls than the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) It is satisfied by passing through the outlet from the mouth C10, the second grand prize opening C20) or a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) (that is, the total number of balls entered into the variable prize opening <the total number of discharges from the variable prize opening) It is possible to determine whether or not the relationship has been established after the lapse of the period during which entry into the variable prize opening is valid, or before the lapse of the period. )
The second condition is that a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) has a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20, etc.). When it is satisfied that it has not passed through the outlet from the winning opening C20) or the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) (ie, the total number of balls entered into the variable winning opening> the total number of discharges from the variable winning opening) It may be determined whether or not the relationship has been established after the elapse of a period for validating the ball to the variable winning opening, or may be determined before the elapse of the period)
When it is determined that an error has occurred while satisfying the first condition, when the special game is being executed, the execution of the special game is continued, and a predetermined error notification (for example, the effect display device SG) An error message is displayed in the display area, the frame decoration lamp D18-L is turned on, but no error sound is output to the speaker D24).
When it is determined that an error has occurred while satisfying the second condition, when the special game is being executed, the execution of the special game is stopped (at this time, when the variation information of the identification information is being displayed) May be stopped, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed = so-called jackpot symbol is being displayed continuously, the continuous display is stopped and the execution of the special game is forcibly terminated = jackpot game It may be ended and returned to the normal game), specific error notification (for example, an error message is displayed in the display area of the effect display device SG, the frame decoration lamp D18-L is lit, and an error sound is output to the speaker D24. )
If it is determined that an error has occurred while satisfying the first condition, then a predetermined operation (for example, turning on the power again while operating an error canceling switch that can be manually operated) is performed. Thus, while the error state is canceled and the predetermined error notification ends, even if the predetermined operation is not performed, at least the predetermined error notification ends when the predetermined period has elapsed (however, Error state does not have to be released)
If it is determined that an error has occurred while satisfying the second condition, then a specific operation (for example, the ball clogging in the variable winning opening is released, and the error release switch that can be operated manually is operated. The error state is canceled and the specific error notification ends, while the specific operation is not performed, even if the predetermined period has elapsed. The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the specific error notification does not end (of course, the error state is not canceled).
In addition, a plurality of variable prize winning openings (for example, the first big prize winning opening C10 and the second big winning prize opening C20) are provided as the variable winning prize openings, and the variable prize winning is not provided with the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). When separately installing a mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10) and a variable prize opening (for example, the second big prize opening C20) having a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) therein, The above error determination condition may be applied only when a variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) having a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is opened therein.
Further, when opening a variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) having a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) inside, it becomes easy to enter the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). Such as opening a variable prize opening (for example, the second big prize opening C20) (that is, entering the specific area at the time of execution of the round) and entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22). A configuration in which a variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) is opened so that it becomes difficult to hit a ball (that is, when it is difficult to enter a specific area at the time of execution of the round) can be executed. If it is, the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is opened so that it is easy to enter the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) (that is, specified at the time of execution of the round). Territory Only when a ball entrance easier) to be applied to said error judgment condition.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (AA2)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution execution) for acquiring a random number triggered by a game ball entering the start port (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10) Means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the validity determination means (for example, First main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-A, second main game winning / not-lotting means MN11-B),
Identification for determining stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of identification information, based on the result of the determination by the determination unit (for example, the first main game winning / not determining lottery unit MN11-A, the second main game winning / not determining lottery unit MN11-B) Information display content determination means (for example, first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, second main game symbol determination means MN41-B);
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the second main game symbol display unit B21g). MP11-C),
If the winning / non-winning determination result (e.g., the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is a win, the stop identification information is displayed after being stopped and displayed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that makes the winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player;
A plurality based on the situation of entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) or the variable winning port (for example, the first major winning port C10, the second major winning port C20). If any of the types of error determination conditions is satisfied, an error determination unit (for example, fraud detection information management unit ME) that determines that an error has occurred is provided,
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are included,
The first condition is a variable prize opening when a special game (a big hit game in which a plurality of rounds are executed, or a small hit game in which a single round is executed) may be executed once (for example, In the period of the entry valid period, which is a period during which the entry to the first grand prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) is regarded as normal (meaning a special game = a series of sections of winning games). In the so-called start demonstration period, the interval between rounds, and the end demonstration period, some or all of them may be excluded from the entry valid period, for example, a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, Satisfaction with the number of balls entering the second grand prize opening C20) being equal to or greater than the first predetermined number {this first predetermined number is different according to the expected number of winning balls that can be obtained in a series of hit games. (For example, expected number of balls = 1 100 in the case of 00, 10 in the case of the expected number of winning balls = 100, etc. However, if there is a small number of expected winning balls in the big hit game, this first predetermined number The difference between the expected number of winning balls may be realized by changing the maximum number of rounds, or the maximum number of rounds may be the same. It may be realized by changing the opening mode of the winning opening, the upper limit of the duration in one round, and / or the upper limit of the allowable number of winnings in one round}, or a variable winning opening outside the period of the winning validity period (For example, the first predetermined winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) are satisfied by the number of balls entering the second predetermined number or more (the second predetermined number is less than the first predetermined number). It is preferable to keep For example, it is possible to exemplify 3), or, after satisfying these conditions, the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) is not released without canceling the error state. Satisfaction is achieved when the number of balls entered is equal to or greater than the third predetermined number (this third predetermined number is preferably less than the second predetermined number, for example, one can be exemplified) ,
When it is determined that the first condition is satisfied and an error has occurred, the game continues to proceed while a predetermined error notification (for example, an error message is displayed in the display area of the effect display device SG, The decorative lamp D18-L is turned on and an error sound is output to the speaker D24).
When it is determined that an error has occurred while satisfying the first condition, a predetermined operation (for example, turning on the power again) is performed, so that the error state is released and the predetermined error notification is performed. On the other hand, even if the predetermined operation is not performed, at least a part of the predetermined error notification is ended when the predetermined period has elapsed {however, the error state may not be canceled, When a first time (for example, 90 seconds) elapses from the occurrence of an error, a part of the error notification (for example, outputting an error sound to the speaker D24) is terminated, and a second time (for example, 300 seconds) from the occurrence of the error. ), A part of the error notification (for example, displaying an error message in the display area of the effect display device SG) is terminated, and the predetermined operation is performed from the occurrence of the error. So even if there is time, rest of the error notification (e.g., the lighting frame decorative lamp D18-L) are configured} may be configured so as not to terminate,
The second condition is that a first entrance detection unit (for example, in FIG. 6) is a detection unit that detects entrance to the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). The total number of game balls detected by the indicated “entrance sensor of the first main game start opening A10”) is directed to the start openings (for example, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10). 2 is a detection unit that detects the incoming ball of the vehicle, and is provided downstream of the first incoming detection unit (for example, the “first main game start opening sensor” shown in FIG. 6). It is satisfied by being more than a specific number than the total number of game balls detected in (There is no particular limitation regarding this specific number, but it may be the same as the first predetermined number described above, or from the second predetermined number described above) Or a larger number than the above-mentioned third predetermined number),
If it is determined that the second condition is satisfied and an error has occurred, the game continues to proceed while a specific error notification (for example, an error message is displayed in the display area of the effect display device SG, The decorative lamp D18-L is turned on and an error sound is output to the speaker D24).
When it is determined that the second condition is satisfied and an error has occurred, a specific operation (for example, power-on again) is performed, so that the error state is canceled and the specific error notification is issued. On the other hand, even if the specific operation is not performed, at least a part of the specific error notification is ended when the specific period has elapsed {however, the error state may not be canceled, When a first time (for example, 90 seconds) elapses from the occurrence of an error, a part of the error notification (for example, outputting an error sound to the speaker D24) is terminated, and a second time (for example, 300 seconds) from the occurrence of the error. ) Elapses, a part of the error notification (for example, an error message is displayed in the display area of the effect display device SG) is terminated, and the specific operation is performed from the occurrence of the error. So even if there is time, rest of the error notification (e.g., the lighting frame decorative lamp D18-L) are configured} may be configured so as not to terminate,
When it is determined that an error has occurred when the first condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that an error has occurred when the second condition is satisfied, the progress of the game is continued. Are common, and the predetermined operation for canceling the error state and the specific operation become a common operation mode (for example, turning on the power again), and an error notification mode (for example, display of the effect display device SG) Error message is displayed in the area, frame decoration lamp D18-L is turned on, error sound is output to speaker D24) and error notification end condition {eg, first time (eg, 90 seconds) has passed since error occurred Then, a part of the error notification (for example, outputting an error sound to the speaker D24) is terminated, and when the second time (for example, 300 seconds) elapses from the occurrence of the error, the error is notified. Even if there is a lapse of time from the end of the notification (for example, displaying an error message in the display area of the effect display device SG) until the error release operation is performed after the error occurs, the error notification is performed. The rest (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L may be turned on) may be configured not to be terminated}.
Regarding the first predetermined number relating to the first condition, the count value accumulated and counted from a predetermined initial value (for example, 0) is cleared when the execution of the special game ends, while the second condition With regard to the specific number relating to the above, the count value accumulated and counted from a predetermined initial value (for example, 0) regardless of whether or not the special game is being executed is not cleared when the execution of the special game is terminated ( Even if it is counted during the special game or during the entry valid period, the count is not cleared) (that is, the entry valid in the special game executed this time) The number of balls entered into the variable prize opening during the period of the period and the total number of balls entered into the variable prize opening during the period of the valid entry period for the special game executed next time When the number exceeds the first predetermined number, the first condition is not satisfied, but the first entry detection unit and the second entry detection that occurred during the entry valid period in the special game executed this time By the total number of the difference in detection between the clubs and the difference in detection between the first entrance detector and the second entrance detector that occurred within the period of the entrance valid period in the special game executed next time The first condition will be satisfied when the number exceeds the specific number for the first time)
It is a pachinko game machine characterized by that.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (AA3)
A main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the main game identification information;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying the auxiliary game identification information;
A member attached to the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that is displaced between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the second main game start port B10) or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) ) Is provided with a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured so that the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter in comparison with the open state,
Based on the entry of the game ball into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), the main game identification information is variably displayed to advance the main game. Main game control means for controlling to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, the game progress means MP, but the main game = so-called special symbol or control related to so-called jackpot game) And)
Auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed based on the entrance of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port (for example, auxiliary game start port H10), the auxiliary game is advanced, and the auxiliary game identification information is stopped in a specific manner. When displayed, auxiliary game control means (for example, the game progress means MP, which controls the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) to be in the open state, particularly the auxiliary game = so-called normal. Control corresponding to design and so-called electric Chu support)
A plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) and the state of entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) If any of the above is satisfied, an error determination unit (for example, fraud detection information management unit ME) that determines that an error has occurred is provided,
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) can be opened in the open driving period. 2 main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is configured to execute an easy-entry game that can be performed one or more times after the closed state is changed to the closed state after the closed state is opened.
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are included,
The first condition is a period in which the entrance to the main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is regarded as normal when the easy entering game is executed once. Outside the period, the number of balls entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) is satisfied by being the first number,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied by the second number of balls entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) outside the pitch effective period. And
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, an error is notified by a predetermined sound, while when it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, It is configured not to perform error notification with a predetermined sound,
The first number is configured to be greater than the second number;
The plurality of types of error determination conditions further include a third condition different from the first condition and the second condition,
The third condition is that a predetermined period {e.g., in the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s) in the entrance detection unit (eg, the second main game start entrance B10s) to the main game start entrance (eg, the second main game start entrance B10). Although it is about several seconds, it is longer than at least the detection period in which it can be considered as a normal entry (the period required for the game ball to pass through from the start to the end of the sensor, and is assumed to be about several tens of ms). Satisfying the fact that gaming balls were detected over a period of time}
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the third condition, an error is notified by the predetermined sound even in a situation where the first condition is not satisfied. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by that.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (AA4)
A main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the main game identification information;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying the auxiliary game identification information;
A member attached to the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that is displaced between an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the second main game start port B10) or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) ) Is provided with a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured so that the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter in comparison with the open state,
Based on the entry of the game ball into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), the main game identification information is variably displayed to advance the main game. Main game control means for controlling to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, the game progress means MP, but the main game = so-called special symbol or control related to so-called jackpot game) And)
Auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed based on the entrance of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port (for example, auxiliary game start port H10), the auxiliary game is advanced, and the auxiliary game identification information is stopped in a specific manner. When displayed, auxiliary game control means (for example, the game progress means MP, which controls the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) to be in the open state, particularly the auxiliary game = so-called normal. Control corresponding to design and so-called electric Chu support)
A plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) and the state of entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) If any of the above is satisfied, an error determination unit (for example, fraud detection information management unit ME) that determines that an error has occurred is provided,
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) can be opened in the open driving period. 2 main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is configured to execute an easy-entry game that can be performed one or more times after the closed state is changed to the closed state after the closed state is opened.
The game state on the auxiliary game side includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which easy-to-enter games are more easily executed than the normal game state, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game state on the auxiliary game side Is configured to change
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are included,
The first condition is a period in which it is assumed that the ball entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) is normal when the easy ball game is executed once in the specific game state. It is satisfied that the number of entrances to the main game start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) is equal to or more than the first predetermined number within the period of a certain entry valid period. It is preferable that the number of balls entering the main game start port at the time of one execution of the easy entry game in a specific game state is a value that cannot occur in design, for example, the end of the easy entry game execution (If the number of balls entering the main game start port is set to be 1 or more as a condition, it can be exemplified that the first predetermined number = 6)) or specific The entry is valid in a situation where the gaming state continues It is satisfied that the number of balls entering the main game start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) is equal to or greater than the second predetermined number outside this period (the first predetermined number is related to the second predetermined number). (For example, it can be exemplified as 5), or after satisfying these conditions, the main game start port (for example, the second main It is satisfied that the number of balls entering the game start opening B10) is equal to or greater than the third predetermined number (the third predetermined number is preferably less than the second predetermined number, for example, one Can be illustrated),
If it is determined that an error has occurred while satisfying the first condition, the progress of the game is forcibly interrupted (when the special game is being executed, the execution of the special game is interrupted). When the main game identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display may be stopped. When the main game identification information is being displayed in a stop state, the so-called jackpot symbol is being displayed continuously. Stop the display and forcibly terminate the execution of the special game = You may end the jackpot game and return to the normal game), a predetermined error notification (for example, display an error message in the display area of the effect display device SG, frame decoration The lamp D18-L is turned on and an error sound is output to the speaker D24).
If it is determined that an error has occurred while satisfying the first condition, then a predetermined operation (for example, opening the door unit D18 and turning on the power again with the power switch Ea) causes an error. The state is canceled and the predetermined error notification ends (that is, if the operation is assumed to be an illegal act of turning the power on again with the power switch Ea without opening the door unit D18), the error state is cleared. (It may be configured not to end the error notification even if there is a lapse of time from the occurrence of an error until the predetermined operation is performed)
The second condition is a period in which it is assumed that the ball entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) is normal when the easy ball game is executed once in the normal game state. It is satisfied that the number of balls entered into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) exceeds a specific number within a certain effective period of the game (for this specific number, the normal game state) It is preferable to set the number of balls entering the main game start opening at the time of one execution of the easy ball game at a value that is unlikely to occur in design, for example, the opening time of the variable member is remarkably short and the short period In the opening time, it is possible to exemplify setting the specific number = 1 when the ball guiding to the second main game start opening B10 is designed to be extremely difficult)
If it is determined that an error has occurred while satisfying the second condition, the progress of the game is continued without interruption, while a specific error notification (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L is turned on, The error message is not displayed in the display area of the display device SG, and the error sound is not output to the speaker D24).
When it is determined that the second condition is satisfied and an error has occurred, a specific operation (for example, turning on the power again with the power switch Ea) is performed to release the error state and the specific state. On the other hand, the error notification is terminated (that is, the error state is canceled even if the operation is assumed to be an illegal act of re-turning on the power with the power switch Ea without opening the door unit D18). Even if this operation is not performed, the pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the specific error notification is ended when a specific period has elapsed.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entry determination means, MJ11-A first main game start entrance entry judgment means MJ11-B second main game start entrance entrance judgment means, MJ11-H auxiliary game start Entrance ball determination means MJ11-C10 First big prize entrance entrance determination means, MJ11-C20 Second entrance prize entrance determination means MJ11-C80 Out entrance entrance determination means, MJ11-C90 Total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11c- 90 Total discharge confirmation number counter, MJ10b Entry information related temporary storage means MJ10c Entry number counter, MJ10c-A First main game start entrance number counter MJ10c2-A First main game start entry confirmation counter, MJ20 random number acquisition determination Execution means MJ21-A first main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-B second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H Auxiliary game disturbance Number acquisition determination execution means, MJ30 Hold control means MJ31 Hold digest control means, MJ31j Fluctuation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ32 Symbol hold means, MJ32-A First main game symbol hold means MJ32b-A First main game symbol hold information temporary storage Means, MJ32-B second main game symbol hold means MJ32b-B second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means, MJ32-H auxiliary game symbol hold means MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means, MN game content determination Means MN10 winning / losing lottery means, MN11-A first main game winning / losing lottery means MN11ta-A first main game winning / losing lottery table, MN11-B second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11ta-B second main game winner / lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery table, MN4 Symbol content determination means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H auxiliary game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 variation mode determination unit, MN51-A first main game variation mode determination unit MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B second main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B second main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP game progression means MP10 display control means, MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol change management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol change management timer, MP20-B 2nd main game start opening electric accessory opening and closing control means MP21-B MP2t-B 2nd main game start opening electric accessory opening timer MP22t2 2nd main game start opening entrance waiting timer, MP30 special game control means MP31 condition determining means, MP22t-B MP32 special game content determination means MP32ta special game content reference table, MP33 special game execution means MP33-C first and second big prize opening electric player opening / closing control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 special game time management means, MP34t special game Timer MP34t2 release timer, MP34t3 big prize entrance waiting timer MP50 specific game control Means, MP51 probability change end condition determination means MP52 time-short end condition determination means, MP52c time-shortage counter MB gaming state temporary storage means, MB10-C first and second main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C first and second main game Symbol information temporary storage means, MB10-H Auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB11b-H Auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage means, MB20b Special game related information temporary storage means MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means, ME Fraud detection information management means MEb Fraud related information temporary storage means, MT information transmission control means MT10 command transmission buffer, MG external signal output control means MH prize ball payout determination means, MHsj payout information transmission / reception means MHsjb payout command temporary storage means, MHc prize ball number counter MHb Not yet Payout ball information temporary storage means A 1st main game lap Equipment, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entrance detection device, A11s2 1st main game start port confirmation sensor A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21g 1st main game symbol display part A21h 1st Main game symbol hold display section, B 2nd main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game start port, B11s 2nd main game start port entrance detection device B11d 2nd main game start port electric combination, B20 2nd main game design Display device B21g Second main game symbol display unit, B21h Second main game symbol display unit C First / second main game shared peripheral device, C10 First big prize port C11s First big prize port prize detection device, C11d No. 1 grand prize opening electric appliance C20 2nd big prize opening, C21s 2nd big prize opening prize detection device C21d 2nd big prize opening electric appliance, C80 out opening C80s out opening entrance ball detection apparatus, C90s total discharge Confirmation sensor H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port entrance detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub control board, SM effect Display control means (sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decoration symbol display control means SM21n drawing display content determination means, SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21b drawing related information temporary storage means , SM21t drawing variation time management timer SM22 drawing hold information display control means, SM22b drawing hold information temporary storage means SM23 background effect display control means, SM23n background effect display content determination means SM23b background effect related information temporary storage means, SM24 Effect display control means SM24n notice effect display content determining means, SM24b notice effect related information temporary storage means SM25 reach effect display control means, SM25n reach effect display content determining means SM25b reach effect related information temporary storage means, SM30 error Notification control means SM31 Error occurrence determination means, SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS Production display means (sub-sub control section), SS10 Sub information transmission / reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Production display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative symbol display area, SG12 First hold display section SG13 Second hold display section KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information,
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on the entrance to the starting opening,
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, the random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired random number as a hold until the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied;
When the acceptance determination condition regarding the suspension is satisfied, the acceptance determination means for executing the determination based on the random number related to the suspension;
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the identification information based on a result of the determination of the validity by the validity determination means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section;
When the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, a predetermined number of pieces to the variable winning a prize opening A special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times to make the variable prize opening in an advantageous state for a player until there is a pitch or a predetermined period elapses;
Game state transition that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter a predetermined entrance than the normal game state, and can be controlled to enter the specific game state after the execution of the special game Control means ;
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the specific stop identification information is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed by the specific stop identification information. A lottery state transition control means having a high probability lottery state having a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and capable of controlling the lottery state to be the high probability lottery state after completion of execution of the special game ,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output the first information,
The execution period of the special game is a start demonstration period that is a waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the unit game, and the last time from the start of execution of the unit game that is the first time. A unit game execution period until the end of execution of the unit game, and an end demonstration period that is a waiting period from the end of execution of the unit game to the end of execution of the special game,
The first information is continuously output over the start demo period, the unit game execution period, and the end demo period.
A period in which the first information is output during the start demonstration period when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information and the special game is executed in the specific game state; A period in which the first information is output during the start demo period when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information and the special game is executed in the normal gaming state; The first information is output during the end demo period when the special game is executed when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information in the specific game state. During the end demo period when the special game is executed while the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information in the normal game state Being configured towards increase of the difference between the period in which the first information is output,
When the special game is executed when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information A of the specific stop identification information and the special game is executed, the high-probability lottery state and It is configured to be in the specific gaming state,
The first information during the end demonstration period when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information and the special game is executed in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state. During the output period, in the low probability lottery state and the normal game state, the termination demonstration when the special game is executed with the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information A It is configured to be shorter than the period during which the first information is output during the period,
The first information during the end demonstration period when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information and the special game is executed in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state. The effect execution time of the effect executed during the output period is the special game in which the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information A in the low probability lottery state and the normal game state. Is configured to be shorter than the production execution time of the effect that is executed during the period in which the first information is output during the end demonstration period.
As the effect, a notification effect for preventing forgetting to take out the privilege recording medium can be executed,
In the low demonstration lottery state and the normal gaming state, the notification effect is displayed during the end demonstration period when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information A and the special game is executed. Configured to run,
There are provided a plurality of winning entrances through which game balls can enter, the plurality of winning entrances include the predetermined entrance and the variable winning entrance,
As external output information for outputting from pachinko gaming machine to the outside, it is configured to be able to output specific information different from the first information,
The specific information satisfies an output condition every time the total number of winning balls awarded based on the winning balls at each of the plurality of winning holes reaches a predetermined number, and the specific information is output. When the new output condition is satisfied when the output period of the certain specific information has expired, the new specific information is output after the output is once terminated. Configured,
The number of prize balls awarded based on one entry to the variable prize opening is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, while the number of prize balls awarded based on one entry to the predetermined entrance is A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being less than the predetermined number.

Images